2008 Pathfinder Owner's Manual

User Manual: 2008-pathfinder

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 448 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2008 Pathfinder Owner's Manual
- Owner's Manual - A
  - Table of Contents
- Owner's Manual - B

Compare the VIN (vehicle identification number) information found on your vehicle's VIN plate

to the VIN information below to determine which Owner's Manual applies to your vehicle. The

VIN plate is located on top of the instrument panel, on the driver's side of your vehicle.

If your vehicle's VIN is XXXXXXXXXXX633672 or lower:

Select Owner's Manual - A in the bookmarks panel on the left side of the screen.

If your vehicle's VIN is XXXXXXXXXXX633673 or higher:

Select Owner's Manual - B in the bookmarks panel on the left side of the screen.

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-

ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this

manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service

and Maintenance Guide” explains details

about maintaining and servicing your ve-

hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer

Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will

explain how to resolve any concerns you

may have with your vehicle, as well as

clarify your rights under your state’s lemon

law.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle

best. When you require any service or have any

questions, they will be glad to assist you with the

extensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle please read this Own-

er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity

with controls and maintenance requirements, as-

sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-

MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

●NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

●ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

●ALWAYS give your full attention to driv-

ing and avoid using vehicle features or

taking other actions that could distract

you.

●ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-

priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen

children should be seated in the rear

seat.

●ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to

all occupants of the vehicle.

●ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

For descriptions specified for four-wheel drive

models, a mark is placed at the begin-

ning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features for

off-road use, failure to operate four-wheel

drive models correctly may result in loss of

control or an accident. Be sure to read

“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIV-

ING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passenger

car because it has a higher center of

gravity for off-road use. As with other

vehicles with features of this type, fail-

ure to operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or an accident.

Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-

road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-

ing collision and rollover”, and “Driving

safety precautions”, in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety or durability, and

may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or per-

formance problems resulting from modi-

fications may not be covered under

NISSAN warranties.

This manual includes information for all options

available on this model. Therefore, you may find

some information that does not apply to your

vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change

specifications or design without notice and with-

out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They

are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or moder-

ate personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-

cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”

or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-

tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the

vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

call attention to an item in the illustration.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain

or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-

ies, may contain perchlorate material. The

following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate

Material – special handling may apply, See

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

BLUETOOTHtis a

trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,

U.S.A. and licensed to

Xanavi Informatics

Corporation.

Gracenotetis a regis-

tered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc. The

Gracenote logo and

logo type, and the

“Powered by

Gracenote” logo are

trademarks of

Gracenote.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form, or by any

means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,

recording or otherwise, without the prior written

permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

NISSAN CARES...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are

our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN

dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to

provide NISSAN directly with comments or

questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free

number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the

following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to the

top of the instrument panel on the driver’s

side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints ...............0-2

Exterior front ......................................0-3

Exterior rear.......................................0-4

Passenger compartment ...........................0-5

Instrument panel...................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations ................0-8

Warning/indicator lights ...........................0-10

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

1. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-12)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bags

(if so equipped) (P. 1-40)

3. Front seat belts (P. 1-12)

4. Supplemental front impact air bags

(P.1-40)

5. Seats (P. 1-2)

6. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) (P.1-47)

7. Seat belts with pretensioners (P. 1-54)

8. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags (if so equipped)

(P. 1-40)

9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-22)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

WII0047

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

1. Engine hood (P. 3-20)

2. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-24)

3. Windshield (P. 8-20)

4. Power windows (P. 2-47)

5. Door locks, keyfob, keys, Intelligent Key

system (P. 3-4, 3-16, 3-2, 3-6)

6. Mirrors (P. 3-26)

7. Tire pressure (P. 9-11)

8. Flat tire (P. 6-2)

9. Tire chains (P. 8-40)

10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-31)

11. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-27)

12. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-30)

13. Tow hooks (if so equipped) (P. 6-14)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

WII0048

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

1. Roof rack (P. 2-46)

2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)

3. Glass hatch (P. 3-21)

4. Rear window washer (P.2-25)

5. Intelligent Key system request button

(P. 3-6)

6. Glass hatch release (P.3-21)

7. Lift gate release switch (P. 3-21)

8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-31)

9. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-22, P. 9-3)

10. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-22)

11. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-6)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

WII0124

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

1. DVD entertainment system

(if so equipped) (P. 4-88)

2. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-50)

3. Map lights (P. 2-53)

4. Sun visors (P. 3-25)

5. HomeLinkTuniversal transceiver

(if so equipped) (P. 2-53)

6. Glove box (P. 2-39)

7. Front seats (P. 1-2)

8. 2nd row seats (P.1-10)

9. 3rd row seats (P. 1-11)

10. Luggage storage (P. 2-42)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

WII0050

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

1. Ventilators (P. 4-35)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-27)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped) (P. 4-85)

4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-40, P. 2-31)

5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator

lights (P. 2-3, 2-12)

6. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-18)

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-24, P. 2-25)

8. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

9. Navigation system* controls

(if so equipped)

10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-40)

11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-39)

12. Power outlet (P. 2-34)

13. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-32)

14. Hill descent control switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-33)

15. Shift selector lever (P. 5-12)

LIC1223

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

16. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-33)

17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-21)

18. Storage

19. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-49)

20. Climate controls (P. 4-36, 4-44)

21. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-31)

22. Ignition switch (P. 5-8)

23. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-24)

24. Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped)

25. Pedal position adjustment switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-24)

26. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-28)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

VQ40DE engine

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-14)

2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)

3. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-23)

4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)

5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)

6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)

7. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)

8. Drive belt location (P.8-17)

9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)

10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)

11. Battery (P. 8-15)

12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

VQ40DE

WDI0633

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

VK56DE engine

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-14)

2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)

3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)

4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)

5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)

6. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)

7. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)

8. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)

9. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)

10. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-23)

11. Battery (P. 8-15)

12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

VK56DE

WDI0627

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

Warning

light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warn-

ing light

2-13

Automatic transmis-

sion check warning

light (if so equipped)

2-13

Automatic transmis-

sion oil temperature

warning light

2-13

Automatic transmis-

sion park warning

light (

model)

2-13

Brake warning light 2-14

Charge warning

light

2-14

Warning

light

Name Page

Door open warning

light

2-15

Engine oil pressure

warning light

2-15

4WD warning light

(model)

2-15

Intelligent Key sys-

tem warning light (if

so equipped)

2-15

Low fuel warning

light

2-16

Low tire pressure

warning light

2-16

Low windshield

washer fluid warning

light

2-17

Seat belt warning

light and chime

2-17

Warning

light

Name Page

Shift P lock warning

light (if so equipped)

2-17

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-17

Indicator

light

Name Page

Automatic transmis-

sion position indica-

tor light

2-18

Cruise main switch

indicator light

2-18

Cruise set switch

indicator light

2-18

4WD shift indicator

light (

model)

2-18

Front passenger air

bag status light

2-18

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Indicator

light

Name Page

High beam indicator

light (Blue)

2-19

Hill descent control

indicator light (if so

equipped)

2-33

Malfunction indica-

tor lamp (MIL)

2-19

Overdrive off indica-

tor light (if so

equipped)

2-20

Security indicator

light

2-20

Slip indicator light 2-20

Transfer 4LO posi-

tion indicator light

(model)

2-20

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

2-21

Indicator

light

Name Page

Vehicle dynamic

control off indicator

light

2-21

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—arosenma

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

MEMO

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats ............................................1-2

Front manual seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ................................1-2

Front power seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ................................1-4

2nd row bench seat adjustment ..................1-5

Head restraint adjustment .......................1-7

Front-Seat Active Head Restraints................1-7

Armrest .......................................1-8

Flexible seating.................................1-8

Seat belts .......................................1-12

Precautions on seat belt usage..................1-12

Child safety...................................1-14

Pregnant women ..............................1-16

Injured persons................................1-16

Three-point type seat belt with retractor..........1-16

Seat belt extenders ............................1-19

Seat belt maintenance .........................1-19

Child restraints...................................1-20

Precautions on child restraints ..................1-20

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system..............................1-22

Top tether strap child restraint ..................1-24

Child restraint installation using LATCH ..........1-25

Child restraint installation using the seat

belts .........................................1-28

Booster seats ....................................1-35

Precautions on booster seats ...................1-35

Booster seat installation ........................1-37

Supplemental restraint system .....................1-40

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system .......................................1-40

Supplemental air bag warning labels.............1-55

Supplemental air bag warning light ..............1-56

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

WARNING

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-

tions on Seat Belt Usage” later in this

section.

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the

seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean

back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever

up and lean your body forward. Release the lever

to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later

in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined

to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is

stopped and the transmission is in P (Park).

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s

seat)

Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of

the seat cushion to the desired position.

WRS0175 WRS0176 WRS0131

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

FRONT POWER SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Operating tips

●The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,

then reactivate the switch.

●Do not operate the power seat switch for a

long period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)”

in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments”for auto-

matic drive positioner operation.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide

the seat forward or backward to the desired

position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch backward until the de-

sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward again, move the switch forward and

move your body forward. The seatback will move

forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage”later

in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-

clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-

hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P

(Park).

WRS0163

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or

down to adjust the angle and height of the seat

cushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back

support to the driver. Move the lever up or down

to adjust the seat lumbar area.

2ND ROW BENCH SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

Reclining

To recline the outboard seatbacks, pull up on the

lever and lean back.

To recline the center seat, pull up on the strap

located on the lower right-hand portion of the

seatback, and lean back.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat

back for occupants of different sizes for added

comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit

(see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this

WRS0164 WRS0389 Outboard seats

WRS0468

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to

allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is

stopped and the transmission is in P (Park).

WARNING

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

See “Precautions on seat belt usage”

later in this section.

Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd row

The outboard seating positions on the 2nd row

bench seat can be tipped forward for easy entry

or exit from the 3rd row bench seat. To enter the

3rd row s

1lift up on the latch located on the

upper corner of the seatback on the 2nd row

bench seat and fold the seatback forward at an

angle over the seat base. This will release the

back of the seat so it may be tipped forward.

Then s

2lift up on the lower corner of the seat

base and tip the outboard seating position of the

2nd row bench seat forward. To exit the 3rd row

bench seat lift up on the same latch and fold the

seatback forward onto the seat base. Then lift up

on the seat base and tip it forward.

WRS0469 LRS0331

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,

push and hold the lock knob and push the head

restraint down.

The head restraints on the 2nd and 3rd row seats

are removable.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted prop-

erly as they may provide significant pro-

tection against injury in an accident. Do

not remove them. Check the adjustment

after someone else uses the seat.

Adjust the head restraint so the center is level

with the center of your ears. FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

●Always adjust the head restraints prop-

erly as specified in this section. Failure

to do so can reduce the effectiveness of

the Active Head Restraint.

●Active Head Restraints are designed to

supplement other safety systems. Al-

ways wear seat belts. No system can

prevent all injuries in any accident.

WRS0470 WRS0134 SPA1025

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

●Do not attach anything to the head re-

straint stalks. Doing so could impair

Active Head Restraint function.

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-

ing the force that the seatback receives from the

occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement

of the head restraint helps support the occu-

pant’s head by reducing its backward movement

and helping absorb some of the forces that may

lead to whiplash type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions

at low to medium speeds in which it is said that

whiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certain

rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head

restraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as

described earlier in this section.

ARMREST

To use the center armrest on the 2nd row bench

seat, pull on the tab in the center of the seat and

fold it down to the resting position.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seats when they are

in the fold-down position. In a collision,

people riding in these areas without

proper restraints are more likely to be

seriously injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone

in your vehicle is in a seat and using a

seat belt properly.

●Do not fold down the rear seats when

occupants are in the rear seat area or

any luggage is on the rear seats.

●Head restraints should be adjusted

properly as they may provide significant

protection against injury in an accident.

Always replace and adjust them prop-

erly if they have been removed for any

reason.

●If the head restraints are removed for

any reason, they should be securely

stored to prevent them from causing

injury to passengers or damage to the

vehicle in case of sudden braking or an

accident.

●When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched posi-

tion. If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

LRS0514

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

●Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seatbacks.

In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

Folding the front passenger’s seatback

(if so equipped)

To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat for

extra storage length when transporting long

items:

1Slide the seat to the rearmost position. Lift

up on the recline lever, located on the out-

side edge of the seat, and fold the seatback

forward as far as it will go. Then lift up on the

latch located on the upper corner of the

seatback to release the back of the seat.

2Once the seatback is released it will enable

you to fold the front passenger seatback flat

over the seat cushion.

3. To return the front passenger’s seat to a

seating position lift up on the seatback and

push it up to an upright position. Then pull up

on the recline lever and lean the seatback to

a proper seating position. Release the lever

to lock the seatback in position.

LRS0608 LRS0609

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

WARNING

●If you fold the front passenger’s seat-

back flat forward to carry longer ob-

jects, be sure this cargo is properly se-

cured and not near an air bag. In a

crash, an inflating air bag might force

that object toward a person. This could

cause severe injury or even death. Se-

cure objects away from the area in

which an air bag would inflate. See

“Precautions on supplemental restraint

system” later in this section.

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the front passenger’s seat

when it is in the fold-down position. Use

of these areas by passengers could re-

sult in serious injury in an accident or

sudden stop.

Folding the 2nd row bench seat

To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum

cargo hauling:

1Lower the head restraints to the full “down”

position. Pull the strap forward, located in

the center of each seat cushion, and fold

each seat cushion toward the front of the

vehicle.

2Then lift up on the recline lever on the side of

the outboard seats to fold the outboard seat-

backs flat. To fold the center seatback flat,

pull up on the strap on the edge of the center

seat cushion and fold the seatback toward

the front of the vehicle.

WRS0472 LRS0494

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

3There is a carpet panel flap on the back of

each seat that can be folded toward the

back of the vehicle

4The carpet panel flap provides a level cargo

floor when the 3rd row seats are also folded

flat.

5. To return the outboard 2nd row bench seats

to a seating position reverse the process for

the outboard seats.

6. To return the center seat to a seating posi-

tion, lift up on the pull strap on the back of

the seat base while lifting on the seatback.

Then push the seat cushion back into place.

Make sure to properly raise the seat-

back to an upright position and push

the seat cushion down into place.

Folding the 3rd row seats

To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum cargo

capacity:

1. Make sure that the head restraints are low-

ered.

2. Stow the third row seat belts in the seat belt

hooks found on the sides of the cargo area.

See “Seat belt hook” later in this section.

3. Pull up on the latch located in the upper

corner of each seatback and lower the seat-

back forward over the seat base.

LRS0658 WRS0471 LRS0653

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

To return the 3rd row seats to a seating position

use the pull straps to raise each seatback. Pull

back until the seatbacks latch into position.

Make sure to properly raise each seatback

to an upright and secured position.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-

justed and you are sitting upright and well back in

your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances

of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the

severity of injury may be greatly reduced.

NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your

passengers to buckle up every time you drive,

even if your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be worn

at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat and, if appro-

priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

●The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. Serious injury or death can occur

if the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

WARNING

●Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck. The

belt should be away from your face and

neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

●Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE

WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could

increase the risk of internal injuries in

an accident.

●Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely

fastened to the proper buckle.

●Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

●Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

●Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

●If the seat belt warning light glows con-

tinuously while the ignition is turned

ON with all doors closed and all seat

belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-

function in the system. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

●Once the pretensioner has activated, it

cannot be reused and must be replaced

together with the retractor. See your

NISSAN dealer.

●Removal and installation of the preten-

sioner system components should be

done by a NISSAN dealer.

●All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any collision

by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-

mends that all seat belt assemblies in

use during a collision be replaced un-

less the collision was minor and the

belts show no damage and continue to

operate properly. Seat belt assemblies

not in use during a collision should also

be inspected and replaced if either

damage or improper operation is noted.

●All child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any col-

lision. Always follow the restraint

manufacturer’s inspection instructions

and replacement recommendations.

The child restraints should be replaced

if they are damaged.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

SSS0014

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

●Rear facing child restraint

●Front facing child restraint

●Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less

than 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rear

facing child restraints. Front facing child re-

straints are available for children who outgrow

rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year

old. Booster seats are used to help position a

vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no

longer use a front facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-

tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit

them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-

ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal

injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-

tories require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. See “Child Re-

straints” later in this section.

Also, there are other types of child restraints

available for larger children for additional protec-

tion.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-

ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”

later in this section.

Infants

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-

mends that infants be placed in child restraints

that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Small Children

Children that are over one year old and weigh at

least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward

facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s

instructions for minimum and maximum weight

and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-

mends that small children be placed in child

restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. You should choose a child

restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow

the manufacturer’s instructions for installation

and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraints

should be seated and restrained by the seat belts

which are provided. The seat belt may not fit

properly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches

(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18

kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be

used to obtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a

commercially available booster seat if the shoul-

der belt in the child’s seating position fits close to

the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat

belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat

should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is

properly positioned across the top, middle por-

tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the

hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating

positions that have a three-point type seat belt.

The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

have a label certifying that it complies with Fed-

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child

has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or

near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt

without the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the cargo

areas while the vehicle is moving. The

child could be seriously injured or killed in

an accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,

and always position the lap belt as low as pos-

sible around the hips, not the waist. Place the

shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your

chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your

abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific

recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific

recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

1Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

Manual front seat shown

WRS0174

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

2Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle until

you hear and feel the latch engage.

●The retractor is designed to lock during

a sudden stop or on impact. A slow

pulling motion permits the seat belt to

move, and allows you some freedom of

movement in the seat.

●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then smoothly

pull the belt out of the retractor.

3Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

4Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the

shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder

and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating

positions three-point seat belts have a locking

mechanism for child restraint installation. It is

referred to as the Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) mode or child restraint mode.

When the ALR is activated the seat belt cannot

be extended again until the seat belt tongue is

detached from the buckle and fully retracted.

Once retracted, the seat belt is in the Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR) mode. See “Child re-

straints” later in this section for more information.

The ALR should be used only for child re-

straint installation. During normal seat belt

use by a passenger, the locking mode

should not be activated. If it is activated it

may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-

sion. It can also change the operation of

the front passenger air bag. See “Front

passenger air bag and status light” later in

this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that the seatbacks are completely se-

cured in the latched position. If they are

not completely secured, passengers may

be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0137 WRS0138

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

Unfastening the seat belts

1To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on

the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-

tracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt

movement by two separate methods:

●When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

●When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows.

●Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-

strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or

if you have any questions about seat belt opera-

tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front

and 2nd row outboard seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-

justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)

To adjust, pull out s

1the adjustment button and

move the shoulder belt anchor s

2to the desired

position, so the belt passes over the center of the

shoulder. The belt should be away from your face

and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Re-

lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulder

belt anchor into position.

WRS0139 Front and 2nd row outboard seats

LRS0242

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

WARNING

●After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the shoul-

der belt anchor up and down to make

sure it is securely fixed in position.

●The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

Failure to do so may reduce the effec-

tiveness of the entire restraint system

and increase the chance or severity of

injury in an accident.

Seat belt hook

When the seat belt is not in use and when folding

down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on

the seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender is available which is

compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of

length and may be used for either the driver or

front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN

dealer for assistance if an extender is required.

WARNING

●Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made the

original equipment seat belts, should

be used with NISSAN seat belts.

●Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use could

result in serious personal injury in the

event of an accident.

●Never use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is

not secured properly, the child could be

seriously injured in a collision or a sud-

den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

●To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat

belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the

seat belts to retract until they are completely

dry.

●If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder

belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

LRS0515

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

●Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-

sembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS WARNING

●Infants and small children should al-

ways be placed in an appropriate child

restraint while riding in the vehicle.

Failure to use a child restraint can re-

sult in serious injury or death.

●Infants and small children should never

be carried on your lap. It is not possible

for even the strongest adult to resist the

forces of a severe accident. The child

could be crushed between the adult and

parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the

same seat belt around both your child

and yourself.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

●Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing

child restraint in the front seat. An in-

flating supplemental front air bag could

seriously injure or kill your child. A rear-

facing child restraint must only be used

in the rear seat.

●NISSAN recommends that the child re-

straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-

cording to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seat than in the front seat. If

you must install a front facing child re-

straint in the front seat, see “Child re-

straint installation using the seat belts”

later in this section.

●Improper use or improper installation

of a child restraint can increase the risk

or severity of injury for both the child

and other occupants of the vehicle and

can lead to serious injury or death in an

accident.

●Follow all of the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation

and use. When purchasing a child re-

straint, be sure to select one which will

fit your child and vehicle. It may not be

possible to properly install some types

of child restraints in your vehicle.

●If the child restraint is not anchored

properly, the risk of a child being in-

jured in a collision or a sudden stop

greatly increases.

●Child restraint anchor points are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used for adult seat belts or

harnesses.

●Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-

tioned to fit the child restraint, but as

upright as possible.

●After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the seat

near the LATCH attachment or by the

seat belt path. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the belt holds the re-

straint in place. The child restraint

should not move more than 1 inch (25

mm). If the restraint is not secure,

tighten the belt as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint. Not all child restraints fit

in all types of vehicles.

●When your child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH System

or a seat belt to prevent it from being

thrown around in case of a sudden stop

or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in a

closed vehicle can become very hot.

Check the seating surface and buckles

before placing your child in the child

restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System

or LATCH. Some child restraints include two rigid

or webbing-mounted attachments that can be

connected to these lower anchors. For details,

see the “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

System (LATCH)” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. See

“Child restraint installation using the seat belts”

later in this section. In general, child restraints are

also designed to be installed with the lap portion

of a lap/shoulder seat belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

infants and small children of various sizes. When

selecting any child restraint, keep the following

points in mind:

●Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors

and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible

child restraints.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to install

child restraints in the 2nd row outboard seating

positions only. Do not attempt to install a child

restraint in the center position using the LATCH

anchors.

LATCH lower anchor point locations

The LATCH system anchors are located at the

rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A

label is attached to the seatback to help you

locate the LATCH system anchors.

WARNING

●Attach LATCH system compatible child

restraints only at the locations shown. If

a child restraint is not secured properly,

your child could be seriously injured or

killed in an accident.

LATCH system anchor locations

WRS0804

LATCH label locations 2nd row bench

WRS0805

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

●The LATCH system anchors are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstance are

they to be used for adult seat belts or

harnesses.

Installing child restraint LATCH anchor

attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to two anchors located at certain

seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to

secure the child restraint. Check your child re-

straint for a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the in-

structions provided by the child restraint manu-

facturer.

LATCH child restraints generally require the use

of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child

restraint” later in this section for installation in-

structions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint. See “Child

restraint installation using LATCH”in this section.

LATCH lower anchor location

WRS0700

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD

RESTRAINT

If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires

the use of a top tether strap, it must be secured to

the anchor point.

WARNING

●Child restraint anchor points are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used for adult seat belts or

harnesses.

●The child restraint top tether strap may

be damaged by contact with items in

the cargo area. Secure any items in the

cargo area. Your child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in a collision if

the top tether strap is damaged.

Top Tether Anchor Point Locations

Anchor points are located in the following loca-

tions:

●2nd row bench on the floor behind the out-

board seating positions as shown.

●2nd row bench center seatback as shown.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap child restraint on the rear

seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-

tails.

Installing top tether strap

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt

or the LATCH system (rear outboard seat posi-

tions only), as applicable.

1. Top tether strap

2. Anchor point

For the 2nd row bench seat, install the top tether

strap as follows:

1. Position the top tether strap over the top of

the head restraint with the head restraint in

the full “down” position.

2nd row bench seat

LRS0659

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point on the seat directly behind the child

restaint.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

For best child restraint fit, see the child restraint

installation instructions in this section and the

child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING LATCH

WARNING

●Attach LATCH compatible child re-

straints only at the locations shown. For

the LATCH lower anchor locations, see

“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-

dren System (LATCH)” in this section. If

a child restraint is not secured properly,

your child could be seriously injured or

killed in an accident.

●The LATCH anchors are designed to

withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under

no circumstance are they to be used for

adult seat belts or harnesses.

●Inspect the lower anchors by inserting

your fingers into the lower anchor area

and feeling to make sure there are no

obstructions over the LATCH anchors,

such as seat belt webbing or seat cush-

ion material. The child restraint will not

be secured properly if the LATCH an-

chors are obstructed.

Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facing child

restraint in the 2nd row seats using LATCH:

1. Recline the seatback if the seatback is ad-

justable to assist in attaching the child re-

straint to the lower anchors.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors.

4. Return the seatback to its normal upright

and locked position.

The back of the child restraint should be secured

against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust

or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct

child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjust-

ment” in this section. If the head restraint is re-

moved, store it in a secure place. Be sure to

install the head restraint when the child restraint

is removed. If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering

Front facing web-mounted – step 3

WRS0799

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

with the proper child restraint fit, try another

seating position or a different child restraint.

Check to make sure it is not contacting front

seats and preventing it from being properly se-

cured. If you are unable to properly secure the

child restraint, move it to another seating position

or try a different child restraint.

5. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

6. If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. See “Top tether strap child restraint”in

this section.

7. Before placing the child in the child restraint,

hold the child restraint near the LATCH at-

tachment and use force to push the child

restraint from side to side, and tug it forward

to make sure that it is securely held in place.

It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If

it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull

again on the anchor attachments to further

tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to

properly secure the restraint, move the re-

straint to another seating position and try

again, or try a different child restraint. Not all

child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Front facing rigid-mounted – step 3

WRS0800

Front facing – step 5

LRS0671

Front facing – step 7

WRS0697

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

8. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 4

through 7.

Rear-facing

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint in the 2nd row seats using LATCH:

1. Recline the seatback if the seatback is ad-

justable to assist in attaching the child re-

straint to the lower anchors.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors.

4. Return the seatback to its normal upright

and locked position.

Check to make sure it is not contacting front

seats and preventing it from being properly se-

cured. If you are unable to properly secure the

child restraint, move it to another seating position

or try a different child restraint.

5. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

Rear facing web-mounted – step 3

WRS0801

Rear facing rigid-mounted – step 3

WRS0802

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,

hold the child restraint near the LATCH at-

tachment and use force to push the child

restraint from side to side, and tug it forward

to make sure that it is securely held in place.

It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If

it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull

again on the anchor attachments to further

tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to

properly secure the restraint, move the re-

straint to another seating position and try

again, or try a different child restraint. Not all

child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3

through 6.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

●Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing

child restraint in the front passenger

seat. Supplemental front air bags in-

flate with great force. A rear-facing

child restraint could be struck by the

supplemental front air bag in a crash

and could seriously injure or kill your

child.

Rear facing – step 5

LRS0673

Rear facing – step 6

LRS0674 WRS0256

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

●NISSAN recommends that child re-

straints be installed in the rear seat.

However, if you must install a forward

facing child restraint in the front pas-

senger seat, move the passenger seat

to the rearmost position. Also, be sure

the front passenger air bag status light

is illuminated to indicate the passenger

air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” later in this sec-

tion for details.

●The three-point seat belt in your vehicle

is equipped with an Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) which must be used

when installing a child restraint.

●Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

otherwise be unsecured and cause in-

jury to the child in a sudden stop or

collision. Also, it can change the opera-

tion of the front passenger air bag. See

“Front passenger air bag and status”

later in this section.

●A child restraint with a top tether strap

should not be used in the front passen-

ger seat.

The instructions in this section apply to child

restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts in

the rear seat or the front passenger seat.

Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear

seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

front-facing direction only. Move the

seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and therefore

must not be used in the front seat.

Front-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1

WRS0699

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions

The back of the child restraint should be secured

against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust

or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct

child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjust-

ment” in this section.

If the head restraint is removed, store it in a

secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint

when the child restraint is removed. If the seating

position does not have an adjustable head re-

straint and it is interfering with the proper child

restraint fit, try another seating position or a dif-

ferent child restraint.

When installing a child restraint in the 2nd or 3rd

row, check to make sure that it is not contacting

the seat directly in front of it. If you are unable to

properly secure the child restraint, move it to

another seating position or try a different child

restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode

(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer-

gency locking retractor mode when the seat

belt is fully retracted.

Front facing – step 3

WRS0680

Front facing – step 4

LRS0667

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while pulling up on the seat

belt.

7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. See “Top tether strap child restraint”in

this section. Do not install child restraints

that require the use of a top tether strap to

seating positions that do not have a top

tether anchor.

Front facing – step 5

LRS0668

Front facing – step 6

WRS0681 Front facing – step 7 WRS0698

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

8. Before placing the child in the child restraint,

hold the child restraint near the seat belt

path and use force to push the child restraint

from side to side, and tug it forward to make

sure that it is securely held in place. It should

not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does

move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on

the shoulder belt to further tighten the child

restraint. If you are unable to properly secure

the restraint, move the restraint to another

seating position and try again, or try a differ-

ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in

all types of vehicles.

9. Check that the retractor is in the Automatic

Locking Retractor mode by trying to pull

more seat belt out of the retractor. If you

cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the

retractor, the retractor is in the Automatic

Locking Retractor mode.

10. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3

through 8.

11. If the child restraint is installed in the front

passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light should illuminate. If this

light is not illuminated see 9Front passenger

air bag and status light9in this section.

Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the Automatic Locking Re-

tractor mode child restraint mode) is canceled.

Rear-facing

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear

seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

Front facing – step 11

WRS0475 Rear-facing – step 1 WRS0256

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

When installing a child restraint in the 2nd or 3rd

row, check to make sure that it is not contacting

the seat directly in front of it. If you are unable to

properly secure the child restraint, move it to

another seating position or try a different child

restraint.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode

(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer-

gency locking retractor mode when the seat

belt is fully retracted.

Rear facing – step 2

WRS0682

Rear facing – step 3

LRS0669

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. 5. Remove any additional slack from the child

restraint; press downward and rearward

firmly in the center of the child restraint to

compress the vehicle seat cushion and seat-

back while pulling up on the seat belt.

6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,

hold the child restraint near the seat belt

path and use force to push the child restraint

from side to side, and tug it forward to make

sure that it is securely held in place. It should

not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does

move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on

the shoulder belt to further tighten the child

restraint. If you are unable to properly secure

the restraint, move the restraint to another

rear seating position and try again, or try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

Rear facing – step 4

LRS0670

Rear facing – step 5

WRS0683

Rear facing – step 6

WRS0684

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

7. Check that the retractor is in the Automatic

Locking Retractor mode by trying to pull

more seat belt out of the retractor. If you

cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out

of the retractor, the retractor is in the Auto-

matic Locking Retractor mode

8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the belt

is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the Automatic Locking Re-

tractor mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER

SEATS

WARNING

●Infants and small children should al-

ways be placed in an appropriate child

restraint while riding in the vehicle.

Failure to use a child restraint or

booster seat can result in serious injury

or death.

●Infants and small children should never

be carried on your lap. It is not possible

for even the strongest adult to resist the

forces of a severe accident. The child

could be crushed between the adult and

parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the

same seat belt around both your child

and yourself.

●NISSAN recommends that the booster

seat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-

cording to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seat than in the front seat. If

you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, see “Booster seat installa-

tion” in this section.

●A booster seat must only be installed in

a seating position that has a

lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a

three-point type seat belt with a

booster seat can result in a serious in-

jury in sudden stop or collision.

●Improper use or improper installation

of a booster seat can increase the risk

or severity of injury for both the child

and other occupants of the vehicle and

can lead to serious injury or death in an

accident.

ARS1098

BOOSTER SEATS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

●Do not use towels, books, pillows or

other items in place of a booster seat.

Items such as these may move during

normal driving or a collision and result

in serious injury or death. Booster seats

are designed to be used with a

lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-

signed to properly route the lap and

shoulder portions of the seat belt over

the strongest portions of a child’s body

to provide the maximum protection dur-

ing a collision.

●Follow all of the booster seat manufac-

turer’s instructions for installation and

use. When purchasing a booster seat,

be sure to select one which will fit your

child and vehicle. It may not be possible

to properly install some types of

booster seats in your vehicle.

●If the booster seat and seat belt is not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured in a collision or a sudden stop

greatly increases.

●Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-

tioned to fit the booster seat, but as

upright as possible.

●After placing the child in the booster

seat and fastening the seat belt, make

sure the shoulder portion of the belt is

away from the child’s face and neck and

the lap portion of the belt does not

cross the abdomen.

●Do not put the shoulder belt behind the

child or under the child’s arm. If you

must install a booster seat in the front

seat, see “Booster seat installation”

later in this section.

●When your booster seat is not in use,

keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-

vent it from being thrown around in

case of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in a

closed vehicle can become very hot.

Check the seating surface and buckles

before placing your child in the booster

seat.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

●Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

LRS0455

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

●Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seat back must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat s

1is chosen, the

vehicle seat back must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. If the seat back is

lower than the center of the child’s ears, a

high back booster seat s

2should be used.

●If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with your

child. Always follow all recommended pro-

cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the rear seats or the front

passenger seat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

WARNING

NISSAN recommends that booster seats

be installed in the rear seat. However, if

you must install a booster seat in the front

passenger seat, move the passenger’s

seat to the rearmost position.

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt auto-

matic locking retractor mode when using

a booster seat with the seat belts.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

LRS0453 LRS0464

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-

most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-

sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to

obtain the correct booster seat fit. See

“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this

section. If the head restraint is removed,

store it in a secure place. Be sure to install

the head restraint when the booster seat is

removed. If the seating position does not

have an adjustable head restraint and it is

interfering with the proper booster seat fit,

try another seating position or a different

booster seat.

WRS0699 Rear center position

LRS0504

Rear outboard position

LRS0502

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shown in the “Three-point seat belt with

retractor” earlier in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light may or may not illuminate,

depending on the size of the child and the

type of booster seat being used. See “Front

passenger air bag and status light” later in

this section.

Front passenger position

LRS0454 WRS0475

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

PRECAUTIONS ON

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-

tion contains important information concerning

the driver and passenger supplemental front air

bags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System), front

seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air

bags, roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags and pretensioner seat

belts.

Supplemental front impact air bag system:

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help

cushion the impact force to the head and chest of

the driver and front passenger in certain frontal

collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system (if so equipped): This

system can help cushion the impact force to the

chest area of the driver and front passenger in

certain side impact collisions. The supplemental

side air bag is designed to inflate on the side

where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag (if so

equipped): This system can help cushion the

impact force to the head of occupants in front

and rear outboard seating positions in certain

side impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact,

the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the

side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover

both curtain air bags are designed to inflate and

remain inflated for a short time.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-

signed to supplement the crash protection pro-

vided by the seat belts and are not a substitute

for them. Seat belts should always be correctly

worn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-

tance away from the steering wheel, instrument

panel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlier

in this section for instructions and precautions on

seat belt usage.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON or

START position.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

WARNING

●The supplemental front air bags ordi-

narily will not inflate in the event of a

side impact, rear impact, rollover, or

lower severity frontal collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce the

risk or severity of injury in various kinds

of accidents.

●The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit or if the front passenger seat

is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” later in this

section.

●The seat belts and the supplemental

front air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in

the seat. The front air bags inflate with

great force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System, if you are unre-

strained, leaning forward, sitting side-

ways or out of position in any way, you

are at greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive serious or

fatal injuries from the supplemental

front air bag if you are up against it

when it inflates. Always sit back against

the seatback and as far away as practi-

cal from the steering wheel or instru-

ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

●The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that

detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

advanced air bag system monitors the

severity of a collision and seat belt us-

age then inflates the air bags. Failure to

properly wear seat belts can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an

accident.

●The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) that turns the front

passenger air bag OFF under some

conditions. This sensor is only used in

this seat. Failure to be properly seated

and wearing the seat belt can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. See “Front Passenger air bag and

status light” later in this section.

●Keep hands on the outside of the steer-

ing wheel. Placing them inside the

steering wheel rim could increase the

risk that they are injured when the

supplemental front air bag inflates.

WRS0031

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

WARNING

●Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them in

your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

WARNING

●Children may be severely injured or

killed when the supplemental front air

bags, side air bags or curtain side-

impact and rollover air bags inflate if

they are not properly restrained. Pre-

teens and children should be properly

restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

WARNING

●Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing

child restraint in the front seat. An in-

flating supplemental front air bag could

seriously injure or kill your child. See

“Child restraints” earlier in this section

for details.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags (if so equipped) and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bags (if so equipped):

●The supplemental side air bag and cur-

tain side-impact and rollover air bag

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of

a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower

severity side collision. Always wear

your seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256 Do not lean against doors or windows.

WRS0431

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

WARNING

●The seat belts, the front seat-mounted

side-impact supplemental air bags and

roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bags are most

effective when you are sitting well back

and upright in the seat. The side air bag

and curtain air bag inflate with great

force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side air

bag on the side of the seatback of the

front seat or near the side roof rails. Do

not allow anyone sitting in the front

seats or rear outboard seats to extend

their hand out of the window or lean

against the door. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the previous illustrations.

Do not lean against doors or windows.

WRS0365

Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0162

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

WARNING

●When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, do

not hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may

be seriously injured. Be especially care-

ful with children, who should always be

properly restrained. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

●Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

supplemental side air bag inflation.

WRS0363 SSS0159

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag modules

(if so equipped)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bags (if so

equipped)

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Supplemental front air bag modules

5. Crash zone sensor

6. Occupant classification system control

unit

7. Occupant classification sensor (pres-

sure sensor)

8. Satellite sensors

9. Seat belt buckle switches

10. Pretensioner retractor

11. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules (if so

equipped)

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front

passenger seats. This system is designed to

meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-

lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,

WRS0474

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

all of the information, cautions and warn-

ings in this manual still apply and must be

followed.

The driver supplemental front air bag is located in

the center of the steering wheel. The passenger

supplemental front air bag is mounted in the

dashboard above the glove box. The supplemen-

tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they may in-

flate if the forces in another type of collision are

similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.

They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper supplemental front air bag

system operation.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual

stage inflators. It also monitors information from

the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit

(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas-

sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen-

ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is

based on the severity of a collision and seat belt

usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it

additionally monitors the weight of an occupant

or object on the seat and seat belt tension. Based

on information from the sensors, only one front air

bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the

crash severity and whether the front occupants

are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front

passenger air bag may be automatically turned

OFF under some conditions, depending on the

weight detected on the passenger seat and how

the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag

is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be

illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will

not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See

“Front passenger air bag and status light” later in

this section for further details. One front air bag

inflating does not indicate improper performance

of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN

dealer. If you are considering modification of your

vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact

NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the

front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a supplemental front air bag inflates, a

fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the

release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and

does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to

not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok-

ing. Those with a history of a breathing condition

should get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of

seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the face and chest of the front occupants. They

can help save lives and reduce serious injuries.

However, an inflating front air bag may cause

facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags

do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts

should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-

senger seated upright as far as practical away

from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The

supplemental front air bags inflate quickly in order

to help protect the front occupants. Because of

this, the force of the front air bag inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too

close to, or is against, the front air bag module

during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The supplemental front air bags operate

only when the ignition switch is in the ON

or START position.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF under some con-

ditions. Read this section carefully to

learn how it operates. Proper use of the

seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-

essary for most effective protection. Fail-

ure to follow all instructions in this

manual concerning the use of seats, seat

belts and child restraints can increase the

risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light is

located near the climate controls. The light oper-

ates as follows:

●Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The is

OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF

and will not inflate in a crash.

●Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,

child or child restraint as outlined in this

section: The illuminates to indicate

that the front passenger air bag is OFF and

will not inflate in a crash.

●Occupied passenger seat and the passen-

ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec-

tion: The light is OFF to indicate that

the front passenger air bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-

matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated

under some conditions as described below in

accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front

passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a

crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your

vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-

matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used

to meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classification

sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the

front passenger seat cushion and is designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the seat by

weight. It works together with seat belt sensors

described later. For example, if a child is in the

front passenger seat, the advanced air bag sys-

tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag

OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a

child restraint of the type specified in the regula-

tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’s

weight can be detected and cause the air bag to

turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-

tion can vary depending on the front passenger

seat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-

signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the

amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when

it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode

(child restraint mode). Based on the weight on

the seat detected by the occupant classification

sensor and the belt tension detected on the seat

belt, the Advanced Air Bag System determines

whether the front passenger air bag should be

automatically turned OFF as required by the

regulations.

WRS0475

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as out-

lined in this manual should not cause the passen-

ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For

small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the

occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-

ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting

on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out

of position), this could cause the sensor to turn

the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant

improperly uses the seat belt in the Automatic

Locking Retractor mode (child restraint mode),

this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF.

Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat

belt properly for the most effective protection by

the seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-

dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.

NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child

restraints and booster seats be properly installed

in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant

classification sensor and seat belt sensors are

designed to operate as described above to turn

the front passenger air bag OFF for specified

child restraints as required by the regulations.

Failing to properly secure child restraints and to

use the Automatic Locking Retractor mode (child

restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or

move in an accident or sudden stop. This can

also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a

crash instead of being OFF. See “Child re-

straints” earlier in this section for proper use and

installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied the

passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a

crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object’s weight detected by the occupant

classification sensor. Other conditions could also

result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants

are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can

monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-

tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.

The light will not illuminate when the front pas-

senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-

ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating

that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the

person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat

properly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the passenger air bag status light may or may not

be illuminated, depending on the size of the child

and the type of child restraint being used. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that

the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be

that the child restraint or seat belt is not being

used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is

installed properly, the seat belt is used properly

and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-

minate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, the system may be sensing

an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the

system is OFF by using a special tool. However,

until you have confirmed with your dealer that

your air bag is working properly, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag status

light will take a few seconds to register a change

in the passenger seat status. For example, if a

large adult who is sitting in the front passenger

seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag

status light will go from OFF to ON for a few

seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system

operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light , located in the meter and gauges area

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front air bag precau-

tions

WARNING

●Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument

panel. Also, do not place any objects

between any occupant and the steering

wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-

jects may become dangerous projec-

tiles and cause injury if the supplemen-

tal front air bag inflates.

●Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will be

hot. Do not touch them; you may se-

verely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This is

to prevent accidental inflation of the

supplemental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or front end structure.

This could affect proper operation of

the supplemental front air bag system.

●Tampering with the supplemental front

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury. Tampering includes

changes to the steering wheel and the

instrument panel assembly by placing

material over the steering wheel pad

and above the instrument panel or by

installing additional trim material

around the air bag system.

●Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing mate-

rial on the seat cushion or by installing

additional trim material, such as seat

covers, on the seat that are not specifi-

cally designed to assure proper air bag

operation. Additionally, do not stow any

objects under the front passenger seat

or the seat cushion and seatback. Such

objects may interfere with the proper

operation of the occupant classifica-

tion sensor (pressure sensor).

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect the

supplemental front air bag system.

Tampering with the seat belt system

may result in serious personal injury.

●Work on and around the supplemental

front air bag system should be done by

a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri-

cal equipment should also be done by a

NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re-

straint System (SRS) wiring should not

be modified or disconnected. Unautho-

rized electrical test equipment and

probing devices should not be used on

the air bag system.

●A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield could

affect the function of the supplemental

air bag system.

●The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy

identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the supplemental front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-

ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags (if so equipped)

and roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag (if so

equipped) system

The front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-

tal air bags are located in the outside of the

seatback of the front seats. The roof-mounted

curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air

bags are located in the side roof rails in all 3 rows.

These systems are designed to meet voluntary

guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to

out-of-position occupants. However, all of the

information, cautions and warnings in this

manual still apply and must be followed.

The front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-

tal air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-

impact and rollover supplemental air bags are

designed to inflate in higher severity side colli-

sions, although they may inflate if the forces in

another type of collision are similar to those of a

higher severity side impact. They are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

They may not inflate in certain side collisions. As

a result, certain vehicle movements (for example,

during severe off roading) may cause the airbags

to inflate.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bags are also designed to inflate

in certain types of rollover collisions or near roll-

overs. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for

example, during severe off roading) may cause

the airbags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper supplemental side air bag

and curtain side-impact and rollover air bag op-

eration.

When the front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain

side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed

by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken

not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-

dition should get fresh air promptly.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to

cushion the impact force on the chest of the front

occupants. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bags help to cush-

ion the impact force to the head of occupants in

the front and rear outboard seating positions in all

rows. They can help save lives and reduce seri-

ous injuries. However, an inflating side air bag, or

curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other

injuries. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-

impact and rollover supplemental air bags do not

provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the supplemental side air

bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as

far away as practical from the door finishers and

side roof rails. The front seat-mounted side-

impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted

curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air

bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the

occupants. Because of this, the force of the front

seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags

and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags inflating can increase

WRS0381

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or

is against, these air bag modules during inflation.

The front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-

tal air bags will deflate quickly after the collision is

over.

The front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-

tal air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-

impact and rollover supplemental air bags will

remain inflated for a short time.

The front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-mounted

curtain side-impact and rollover supple-

mental air bags operate only when the ig-

nition switch is in the ON or START posi-

tions.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

●Do not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. Also, do not

place any objects (an umbrella, bag,

etc.) between the front door finisher

and the front seat. Such objects may

become dangerous projectiles and

cause injury if the supplemental side air

bag inflates.

●Right after inflation, several front seat-

mounted side-impact supplemental air

bag and curtain side-impact and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag system com-

ponents will be hot. Do not touch them;

you may severely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag system. This

is to prevent accidental inflation of the

front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags or damage

to the front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag system.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental curtain air bag system.

●Tampering with the front seat-mounted

side-impact supplemental air bags may

result in serious personal injury. For

example, do not change the front seats

by placing material near the seatbacks

or by installing additional trim material,

such as seat covers, around the front

seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-

tal air bags.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/22/07—debbie

●Work around and on the roof-mounted

curtain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bags should be done

by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-

trical equipment should also be done by

a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or dis-

connected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the front seat-mounted

side-impact supplemental air bags or

roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors are

yellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the supplemental side air

bag and curtain air bag system and guide the

buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (Front

seats)

WARNING

●The seat belts with pretensioners can-

not be reused after activation. It must

be replaced together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

●If the vehicle becomes involved in a

frontal collision but the pretensioner is

not activated, be sure to have the pre-

tensioner system checked and, if nec-

essary, replaced by your NISSAN

dealer.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belts with pretensioners. This

is to prevent accidental activation of

the seat belts with pretensioners or

damage to the seat belts with preten-

sioners operation. Tampering with the

seat belts with pretensioners may result

in serious personal injury.

●Work around and on the seat belts with

pretensioners should be done by a

NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical

equipment should also be done by a

NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the seat belts

with pretensioners.

●If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a

NISSAN dealer. Correct pretensioner

disposal procedures are set forth in the

appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.

Incorrect disposal procedures could

cause personal injury.

The front seat belts with pretensioners activates

in conjunction with the front supplemental air bag

systems. Working with the seat belt retractor, it

helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-

comes involved in certain types of collisions,

helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt’s

retractor. These seat belts are used the same as

conventional seat belts.

When the pretensioner activates, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

After the pretensioners have activated, load lim-

iters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if

necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioners, the

supplemental air bag warning light will not

come on, will flash intermittently or will turn on for

7 seconds and remain on after the ignition key

has been turned to the ON or START position. In

this case, the pretensioner may not function

properly. They must be checked and repaired.

Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the seat belts with preten-

sioners and guide the buyer to the appropriate

sections in this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air bag warning labels

The warning labels are located on the sur-

face of the sun visor.

2. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags warning label (if so

equipped)

The warning label is located on the side of

the passenger’s side center pillar.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front air

bags, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-

impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems

are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustra-

tion.

LRS0397

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel, moni-

tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag,

front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air

bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag and seat belts with

pretensioners systems. The circuits monitored by

the supplemental air bag warning light are the Air

bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, sat-

ellite sensors, rollover sensor, front air bag mod-

ules, side air bag modules, curtain air bag mod-

ules, pretensioner and all related wiring.

When the ignition key is in the ON or START

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

supplemental front air bag, front seat-mounted

side-impact supplemental air bags, roof-

mounted curtain side-impact, rollover supple-

mental air bag and pretensioner seat belt sys-

tems need servicing:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplemental front

air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags, roof-mounted curtain side-

impact and rollover supplemental air bag or pre-

tensioner systems may not operate properly. It

must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle

to the nearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the supplemental

front air bag, front seat-mounted side-

impact supplemental air bags, roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bag and/or seat belt

with pretensioners will not operate in an

accident. To help avoid injury to yourself

or others, have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, front seat-

mounted side-impact supplemental air bags,

roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bag and pretensioners are de-

signed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a

reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental

air bag warning light remains illuminated after

inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of

these supplemental air bag systems should be

done only by a NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-

hicle, the supplemental front air bags, front seat-

mounted side-impact supplemental air bags,

roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bag, pretensioners and related

parts should be pointed out to the person per-

LRS0100

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

forming the maintenance. The ignition key should

always be in the LOCK position when working

under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

●Once a supplemental front air bag, front

seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-

tal air bags, roof-mounted curtain side-

impact and rollover supplemental air

bag has inflated, the air bag module will

not function again and must be re-

placed. Additionally, if any of the

supplemental front air bags inflate, the

activated seat belts with pretensioners

must also be replaced. The air bag mod-

ule and seat belts with pretensioners

should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.

The air bag module and seat belts with

pretensioners cannot be repaired.

●The supplemental front air bag, roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag systems, and

the seat belts with pretensioners

should be inspected by a NISSAN

dealer if there is any damage to the

front end or side portion of the vehicle.

●If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag, seat belts with preten-

sioners or scrap the vehicle, contact a

NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental

air bag and seat belts with pretension-

ers disposal procedures are set forth in

the appropriate NISSAN Service

Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel...................................2-2

Meters and gauges ................................2-3

Speedometer and odometer .....................2-4

Trip computer (if so equipped) ...................2-5

Tachometer ....................................2-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge ...............2-6

Fuel gauge ....................................2-7

Engine oil pressure gauge .......................2-8

Voltmeter ......................................2-8

Compass display (if so equipped) ...................2-9

Compass display ...............................2-9

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ......2-12

Checking bulbs ...............................2-13

Warning lights ................................2-13

Indicator lights ................................2-18

Audible reminders .............................2-21

Security systems .................................2-22

Vehicle security system.........................2-22

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system .............2-23

Windshield wiper and washer switch ...............2-24

Switch operation ..............................2-24

Rear window wiper and washer switch..............2-25

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch ..................................2-26

Headlight and turn signal switch....................2-27

Headlight control switch........................2-27

Daytime running light system (Canada only) ......2-29

Instrument brightness control ...................2-30

Turn signal switch .............................2-30

Fog light switch (if so equipped) ................2-30

Hazard warning flasher switch .....................2-31

Horn ............................................2-31

Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) .............2-32

Heated seat (if so equipped).......................2-32

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch............2-33

Hill descent control switch (if so equipped)..........2-33

Power outlet .....................................2-34

Storage .........................................2-36

Storage trays .................................2-36

Storage bins ..................................2-37

2nd row under-seat storage bin .................2-38

Console box ..................................2-38

Glove box ....................................2-39

Sunglasses holder.............................2-39

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Map pockets..................................2-40

Seat pockets..................................2-40

Cup holders ..................................2-40

Cargo area storage ............................2-42

Luggage hooks................................2-42

Cargo nets ...................................2-44

Roof rack .....................................2-46

Windows ........................................2-47

Power windows ...............................2-47

Sunroof (if so equipped)...........................2-50

Automatic sunroof .............................2-50

Interior lights .....................................2-51

Personal lights (if so equipped) ....................2-52

Map lights .......................................2-53

Cargo light ......................................2-53

HomeLinkTuniversal transceiver (if so equipped).....2-53

Programming HomeLinkT.......................2-54

Programming HomeLinkTfor Canadian

customers ....................................2-55

Operating the HomeLinkTuniversal

transceiver....................................2-55

Programming trouble-diagnosis .................2-56

Clearing the programmed information ............2-56

Reprogramming a single HomeLinkTbutton ......2-56

If your vehicle is stolen .........................2-56

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. Ventilators (P. 4-35)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-27)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped) (P. 4-85)

4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-40, P. 2-31)

5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator

lights (P. 2-3, 2-12)

6. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-18)

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-24, P. 2-25)

8. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

9. Navigation system* controls

(if so equipped)

10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-40)

11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-39)

12. Power outlet (P. 2-34)

13. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-32)

14. Hill descent control switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-33)

15. Shift selector lever (P. 5-12)

LIC1223

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

16. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-33)

17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-21)

18. Storage

19. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-49)

20. Climate controls (P. 4-36, 4-44)

21. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-31)

22. Ignition switch (P. 5-8)

23. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-24)

24. Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped)

25. Pedal position adjustment switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-24)

26. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-28)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

1. Warning/indicator lights

2. Tachometer

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Voltmeter

6. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Trip com-

puter (if so equipped)

7. Engine oil pressure gauge

8. Engine coolant temperature gauge

WIC1040

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. Speedometer

2. Odometer

3. Change button

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in

miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour

(km/h).

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-

hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

Changing the display:

For vehicles equipped with twin trip odometer,

pushing the change button changes the display

as follows:

Trip →Trip →Trip

WIC0912 With twin trip odometer

LIC0780

2-4 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

For vehicles equipped with trip computer, push-

ing the change button changes the display as

follows:

Trip →Trip →Distance to Empty →

Average speed →Average fuel consumption →

Journey time →Trip

For additional information, refer to “Trip com-

puter” later in this section.

For vehicles equipped with navigation system,

refer to “How to use the INFO button” in the

“Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio

systems” section later in this manual.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-

ond resets the trip odometer to zero.

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)

The display of the trip computer is situated in the

speedometer display. When the ignition is turned

to ON, the display scrolls all the modes of the trip

computer and then shows the mode chosen be-

fore the ignition switch was turned OFF.

When the ignition switch is turned to ON, modes

of the trip computer can be selected by pushing

the trip computer change button. The following

modes can be selected:

Distance to empty (dte—mile or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can be

driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-

ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the

fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warning

feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode is

automatically selected and the digits blink in or-

der to draw the driver’s attention. Press the

change button if you wish to return to the mode

that was selected before the warning occurred.

The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until the

vehicle is refueled.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte

display will change to (----).

NOTE:

●If the amount of fuel added while the

ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-

play just before the ignition switch is

turned OFF may continue to be dis-

played.

●When driving uphill or rounding curves,

the fuel in the tank shifts, which may

momentarily change the display.

Average speed (MPH or km/h)

The average speed mode shows the average

vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done

by pressing the change button for more than

approximately 1 second. The display is updated

every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a

reset, the display shows (----).

Average fuel consumption (Mpg or

l/100km)

The average fuel consumption mode shows the

average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pressing the change button

With trip computer

LIC0781

Instruments and controls 2-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

for more than approximately 1 second. The dis-

play is updated every 30 seconds. At about the

first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display

shows (----).

Journey time

The journey time mode shows the time since the

last reset. The displayed time can be reset by

pressing the change button for more than ap-

proximately 1 second.

Trip computer reset

Pushing the change button for more than 3 sec-

onds will reset all modes except Trip A and dis-

tance to empty (dte). TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine

into the red zone s

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-

gine speed. Operating the engine in the

red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-

ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range s

1when the gauge needle points

within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

LIC0738 LIC0739

2-6 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal

range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease

temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-

mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as

safely possible. If the engine is over-

heated, continued operation of the ve-

hicle may seriously damage the engine.

See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In

case of emergency”section for immediate

action required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level

in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the

ignition key is turned to OFF.

The low fuel warning light comes on when the

amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-

ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

●If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the malfunction indicator light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as

possible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

●For additional information, see “Mal-

function indicator light (MIL)” later in

this section.

LIC0740

Instruments and controls 2-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-

tem oil pressure while the engine is running. The

needle should be in the middle of the gauge when

the engine is running.

CAUTION

●This gauge is not designed to indicate

low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to

check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.)

●If the gauge needle does not move with

the proper amount of engine oil, have

the vehicle checked by a NISSAN

dealer. Continued vehicle operation in

such a condition could cause serious

damage to the engine.

VOLTMETER

When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-

tion, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage.

When the engine is running, it indicates the gen-

erator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts drop below

the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal

range (11 – 15 volts) s

1while the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging system

is not functioning properly. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

LIC0741 WIC1299

2-8 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-

dicates heading direction of vehicle.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the or button as described in the

charts below to activate various features of the

automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.

Type A

Push and hold

the

button for about:

Feature:

(Push button again for about 1 sec-

ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 seconds Automatic anti-glare/indicator light

toggles on/off

11 seconds Compass zone can be changed to

correct false compass readings

13 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

Type B

Push and hold

the

button for about:

Feature:

(Push button again for about 1 sec-

ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 seconds Compass zone can be changed to

correct false compass readings

10 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glare

feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview

mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section.

COMPASS DISPLAY

Push the or button for about 1 sec-

ond when the ignition key is in the ON position to

toggle the outside temperature and compass

direction display s

1on or off. The display will

indicate the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

N: North

E: East

S: South

W: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by

driving the vehicle in three complete circles at

less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

Type A

WIC0904

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

You can also calibrate the compass by driving

your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-

pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three

complete circles.

Type B

LIC0583

WIC0355

2-10 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo-

graphical north is known as variance. In some

areas, this difference can sometimes be great

enough to cause false compass readings. Follow

these instructions to set the variance for your

particular location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for about

11 seconds or the button for about 8

seconds. The current zone number will ap-

pear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.

Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the or the button repeat-

edly to toggle through the zone numbers

until the desired number appears in the dis-

play. Once you have selected a zone num-

ber, the display will show a compass direc-

tion within a few seconds.

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with automatic

correction function. If the correct direction is not

shown, follow this procedure.

1. With the display turned on, press and hold

the button for about 13 seconds or

the for about 10 seconds. The “C”

icon in the compass display will illuminate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle

in three complete circles at a maximum

speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the display

should return to normal.

CAUTION

●Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,

which are attached to the vehicle by

means of a magnet. They affect the op-

eration of the compass.

●When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened

with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass

cleaner directly on the mirror as it may

cause the liquid cleaner to enter the

mirror housing.

Instruments and controls 2-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

Low fuel warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Automatic transmission check warning light (if

so equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic transmission oil temperature warn-

ing light

Low windshield washer fluid warning light Hill descent control indicator light (if so

equipped)

Automatic transmission park warning light

(model)

Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

or Brake warning light Shift P warning light (if so equipped) Overdrive off indicator light (if so equipped)

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light

Door open warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light Slip indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Transfer 4LO position indicator light

(model)

4WD warning light ( model) Cruise set switch indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Intelligent Key system warning light (if so

equipped)

4WD shift indicator light ( model) Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-12 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake

and turn the ignition key to the ON position

without starting the engine. The following lights

will come on:

, or , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then go

off:

or , , , , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate

a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the

electrical system. Have the system repaired

promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the

ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-

tion is turned off. The brake system then operates

normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See

9Brake system9in the 9Starting and driving9sec-

tion.

Automatic transmission check

warning light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the light

comes on for about 2 seconds. If the light comes

on at any other time, it may indicate the automatic

transmission system is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Automatic transmission oil

temperature warning light

This light comes on when the automatic transmis-

sion oil temperature is too high. If the light comes

on while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as

soon as safely possible until the light turns off.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation when the A/T

oil temperature warning light is on may

damage the automatic transmission.

Automatic transmission park

warning light ( model)

WARNING

●If the ATP light is ON, this indicates that

the automatic transmission P (Park) po-

sition will not function and the transfer

case is in neutral.

●When parking, always make sure that

the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates

and the parking brake is set. Failure to

engage the transfer position in 2WD,

AUTO, 4H or 4LO could result in the

vehicle moving unexpectedly, resulting

in serious personal injury or property

damage.

●Part time 4WD: Shift the 4WD switch

into the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position again

to turn off the ATP warning light when

the automatic transmission selector le-

ver is in the P position and the ATP

warning light is ON. (Before shifting the

4WD switch into the 4LO position, move

the automatic transmission selector le-

ver into the N position once, shift the

selector lever into P again and make

sure the ATP warning light is OFF.)

Instruments and controls 2-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—arosenma

●All mode 4WD: The warning light may

come on when the ignition switch is ON

and the automatic transmission lever is

shifted to the P position while shifting

the transfer case between 4H and 4LO.

Shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD,

AUTO, 4H, or 4LO position again to turn

off the ATP warning light when the

warning light comes on. (Before shift-

ing the 4WD switch into the 4LO posi-

tion or out of 4LO in the 4H position,

move the automatic transmission se-

lector lever into the N position.) Shift

the selector lever into the P position

and make sure that the 4WD shift indi-

cator light is ON and the ATP warning

light is OFF.)

This light indicates that the automatic transmis-

sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans-

fer control is not secured in any drive position

while the automatic transmission selector lever is

in the P (Park) position, the transmission will

disengage and the drive wheels will not lock.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and

the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition key is in the ON position, the

light comes on when the parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition key is in the ON position, the

light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light

comes on while the engine is running with the

parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and

perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid

as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

WARNING

●Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driv-

ing could be dangerous. If you judge it

to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest

service station for repairs. Otherwise,

have your vehicle towed because driv-

ing it could be dangerous.

●Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

●If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate the charging system is not func-

tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check

the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,

missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN

dealer immediately.

CAUTION

●Do not ground electrical accessories

directly to the battery terminal. Doing

so will bypass the variable control sys-

tem and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely. Refer to “Variable

voltage control system” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section later

in this manual.

2-14 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—arosenma

●Do not continue driving if the generator

belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not

closed securely while the ignition key is in the ON

position.

Engine oil pressure warning

light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the

light flickers or comes on during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other

authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is not

designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the

dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause se-

rious damage to the engine almost imme-

diately. Such damage is not covered by

warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it

is safe to do so.

4WD warning light

(model)

The 4WD warning light comes on when the key

switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the

engine is started.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly,

the warning light will either remain illuminated or

blink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Starting

and driving” section.

CAUTION

●If the warning light comes on or blinks

during operation, have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

●Do not drive on dry hard surface roads

in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD

warning light turns on when you are

driving on dry hard surface roads:

– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the

4WD shift switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for all mode 4WD

vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift

the transmission selector lever to the

N position with the brake pedal de-

pressed and shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for part time 4WD

vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift

the transmission selector lever to the

N position with the brake pedal de-

pressed and shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

●If the warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

Intelligent Key system warning

light (if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key system warning light illumi-

nates green when the ignition switch can be

turned. The Intelligent Key system warning light

illuminates red when the ignition switch cannot

be turned.

The Intelligent Key system warning light blinks

red if the Intelligent Key is taken outside of the

vehicle while the ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position.

●If the Intelligent Key system warning light

blinks, make sure of the location of the Intel-

ligent Key as soon as possible. The Intelli-

gent Key should be carried by the driver

while operating the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-15

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—arosenma

●The Intelligent Key system warning light

turns off about 10 seconds after the Intelli-

gent Key is brought inside the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key system warning light blinks

green indicating that the Intelligent Key battery is

almost discharged.

See “Intelligent Key system” in the “Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel

tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-

nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E

(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel

in the tank when the fuel gauge needle

reaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warning

light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire

pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about 1 second

and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres-

sure, the warning light will illuminate. If you select

the tire pressure information (if so equipped) in

the display, the LOW PRESSURE warning mes-

sage will be displayed. The tire pressure for each

tire will also be displayed.

When the low tire pressure warning light illumi-

nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres-

sure to the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.

The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure is

adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recom-

mended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at

speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning

light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure.

For additional information, see “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving”section and in the “In case of emergency”

section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. The light will remain on

after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section.

WARNING

●If the light does illuminate with the ig-

nition switch in the ON position, have

the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer

as soon as possible.

2-16 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could re-

sult in serious personal injury. Check

the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust

the tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light OFF.

If the light still comes on while driving

after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire

may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-

place it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, tire pressure will not be

indicated, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

●The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

●If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

●Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Low windshield washer fluid

warning light

This light comes on when the windshield washer

fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid

as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your

seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the

ignition key is turned to the ON or START position

and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt

is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds

for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt

is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if

the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened

when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For

7 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the system does not activate the warn-

ing light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” section

for precautions on seat belt usage.

Shift P warning light (if so

equipped)

This light blinks red and the key reminder chime

sounds if the shift selector lever is in any position

other than P (Park) and the ignition switch is in

the OFF position. Return the shift selector lever

to P (Park) with the ignition switch in the OFF

position and the light will turn off. Place the

ignition switch in the LOCK position and the

chime will turn off.

Supplemental air bag warning

light

When the ignition key is in the ON or START

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

Instruments and controls 2-17

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

supplemental front air bags, front seat-mounted

side-impact supplemental air bags (if so

equipped), roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bags (if so

equipped) and seat belt with pretensioner sys-

tems need servicing and your vehicle must be

taken to a NISSAN dealer:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental

restraint system (air bag system) and/or the seat

belts with pretensioner systems may not function

properly. For additional details see “Supplemen-

tal restraint system” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” section

of this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the supplemental

front air bag, front seat-mounted side-

impact supplemental air bags (if so

equipped), roof-mounted curtain side-

impact and rollover supplemental air bags

(if so equipped) and/or seat belts with

pretensioner systems will not operate in

an accident. To help avoid injury to your-

self or others, have your vehicle checked

by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic transmission

position indicator light

When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-

tion, this indicator light shows the automatic

transmission selector lever position. See “Driving

the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Cruise main switch indicator

light

The light comes on when the cruise control main

switch is pushed. The light goes out when the

main switch is pushed again. When the cruise

main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise

control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator

light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is

controlled by the cruise control system. If the light

blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate

the cruise control system is not functioning prop-

erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

4WD shift indicator light

(model)

The light should turn off within 1 second after

turning the ignition switch to ON.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-

cator light will illuminate the position selected by

the 4WD shift switch.

The 4WD shift indicator light may blink

while shifting from one drive mode to the

other.

Front passenger air bag

status light

The front passenger air bag status light ( )

will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be

OFF depending on how the front passenger seat

is being used.

2-18 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

For front passenger air bag status light operation,

see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in

the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high

beams are on and goes out when the low beams

are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on

when the passing signal is activated.

Hill descent control system on

indicator light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is turned ON, this light

comes on briefly and then turns off.

The light comes on when the hill descent control

system is activated.

If the hill descent control switch is on and the

indicator light blinks, the system is not engaged.

If the indicator light does not come on or blink

when the hill descent switch is on, the system

may not be functioning properly. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Hill descent con-

trol switch” later in this section and “Hill descent

control system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Malfunction indicator light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate a

potential emission control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may also come on

steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if

the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure

the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly,

and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4

liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20

seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when

the engine is not running, it indicates that the

vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-

tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-

ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test”in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

Operation

The malfunction indicator light will come on in

one of two ways:

●Malfunction indicator light on steady — An

emission control system malfunction has

been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If

the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten

or install the cap and continue to drive the

vehicle. The light should turn off after

a few driving trips. If the light does not

turn off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You

do not need to have your vehicle towed to

the dealer.

●Malfunction indicator light blinking — An en-

gine misfire has been detected which may

damage the emission control system. To re-

duce or avoid emission control system dam-

age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

Instruments and controls 2-19

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking

and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected

by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-

ing the emission control system checked

and repaired as necessary could lead to

poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,

and possible damage to the emission con-

trol system.

Overdrive off indicator light

(A/T model) (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the overdrive function

is OFF.

The automatic transmission overdrive function is

controlled by the overdrive switch.

For additional information, see “Driving the ve-

hicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in

the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function

indicates the security system equipped on the

vehicle is operational.

For additional information, see “Security sys-

tems” later in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator light will blink when the traction

control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery

road conditions may exist if the slip indicator

blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving

accordingly.

The slip indicator light also comes on when you

turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light

will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is

operational. If the light does not come on or does

not go off, have the traction control system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the trac-

tion control system is disabled and the slip indi-

cator light will not turn off after 2 seconds when

the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

To reset the system, you must perform the reset

procedure. Refer to “Vehicle dynamic control

(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

If the light does not go off after performing the

reset procedure, have the traction control system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Transfer 4LO position

indicator light ( model)

The light should turn off within 1 second after

turning the ignition switch to ON.

This light comes on when the 4WD shift switch is

set in the 4LO position with the ignition key in the

ON position.

The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the

switch while driving.

Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator

light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch

to 4LO.

The indicator light may blink while shifting

from one drive mode to the other.

All mode 4WD (if so equipped)

If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position

and the light blinks, stop the vehicle, drive slowly

forward and the light will turn on.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop the

vehicle and shift the transmission selector lever

to the N position with the brake pedal depressed,

then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to

4LO or 4H.

2-20 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch

between 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicle

and shift the transmission selector lever to the N

position with the brake pedal depressed.

Part time 4WD (if so equipped)

The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking and

remain illuminated or turn off before shifting the

transmission into gear. If the transmission selec-

tor lever is shifted from the N position to any other

gear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the

vehicle may move unexpectedly.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop the

vehicle and shift the transmission selector lever

to the N position with the brake pedal depressed,

then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to

4LO or 4H.

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch

between 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicle

and shift the transmission selector lever to the N

position with the brake pedal depressed.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal

switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned

on.

Vehicle dynamic control off

indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the vehicle

dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF, the

transfer case is in the 4LO position (

model), or when the vehicle dynamic control sys-

tem is not functioning properly. This indicates the

vehicle dynamic control system is not operating.

Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch again

or restart the engine and the system will operate

normally. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)

system” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

The vehicle dynamic control light also comes on

when you turn the ignition key to the ON position.

The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the

system is operational. If the light stays on or

comes on along with the SLIP indicator light

while you are driving, have the vehicle dynamic

control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the ve-

hicle dynamic control system is disabled and the

VDC indicator light will not turn off after 2 sec-

onds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position. To reset the system, you must perform

the reset procedure. Refer to “Vehicle dynamic

control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

If the light does not go off after performing the

reset procedure, have the traction control system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the vehicle dynamic control system is op-

erating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the

system working when starting the vehicle or ac-

celerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.

When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it

makes a high pitched scraping sound when the

vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake

pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened while

the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove the key

and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a

chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened if

the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-

ing the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

●Vehicle security system

●NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors

when the system is armed. It is not, however, a

motion detection type system that activates when

a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or

exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,

and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be

aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,

well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such

as component locks, identification markers, and

tracking systems, are available at auto supply

stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer

may also offer such equipment. Check with your

insurance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows and the glass hatch. (The

system can be armed even if the win-

dows are open. However, the glass

hatch must be closed.)

2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion and remove the key.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors

can be locked with:

●the power door lock switch (if the door is

opened, locked and then closed).

●the key — master or mechanical (Intelli-

gent Key models).

●any request switch (Intelligent Key mod-

els).

●the keyfob or Intelligent Key.

Keyfob and Intelligent Key operation:

●Push the button. All doors lock.

The hazard lights flash twice and the horn

beeps once to indicate all doors are

locked.

●When the button is pushed with

all doors locked, the hazard lights flash

twice and the horn beeps once as a re-

minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to

“Silencing the horn beep feature” in the Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” section or

“Comfort & Convenience settings” in the

“Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems” section.

WIC0841

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-22 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

4. Confirm that the indicator light comes

on. The light stays on for about 30

seconds. The vehicle security system is now

pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-

hicle security system automatically shifts

into the armed phase. The light begins

to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the

30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’s

door is unlocked by the key, a request

switch, the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or if the

ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the

system will not arm.

●If the key is turned slowly when locking

the driver’s door, the system may not

arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned

beyond the vertical position toward the

unlock position to remove the key, the

system may be disarmed when the key

is removed. If the indicator light fails to

glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door

once and lock it again.

●Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

arm with all doors closed and locked

with the ignition key in the OFF posi-

tion.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following

alarm:

●The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

●The alarm automatically turns off after ap-

proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with

again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking

the driver’s door with the key, a request

switch or by pressing the button on

the keyfob or Intelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

●opening a door without using the key or

keyfob (even if the door is unlocked by using

the inside lock knob or the power door lock

switch).

●opening the glass hatch without unlocking

the lift gate.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s

door with the key, pressing the button on

the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or by unlocking all

doors with any request switch (Intelligent Key

models).

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of a

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automatic payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following pro-

cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position, and wait approximately 10 sec-

onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

Instruments and controls 2-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Statement related to Section 15 of FCC

Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT

ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-

ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-

PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-

SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD

VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-

ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever the

ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC

position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-

functioning, the light will remain on while the

ignition key is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-

gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-

vice as soon as possible. Please bring all

registered keys that you have when visiting

your NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

can be adjusted by turning the knob toward

A(Slower) or s

B(Faster). Also, the inter-

mittent operation speed varies in accor-

dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,

when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-

tent operation speed will be faster.)

LIC0474 WIC0843

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH

2-24 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

NOTE:

You can turn on or turn off the driving

speed dependent intermittent wiper func-

tion for vehicles with navigation system.

Refer to “Comfort & Convenience settings”

in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems” section later in

this manual.

2Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

3High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-

tion

Push the lever up s

4to have one sweep opera-

tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you s

5to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the windshield and

obscure your vision which may lead to an

accident. Warm the windshield with the

defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the reser-

voir tank is empty.

●Do not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at

full strength. Some methyl alcohol

based washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if spilled

while filling the window washer reser-

voir tank.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir

tank to mix the washer fluid concen-

trate and water.

The rear window wiper and washer operate when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position

to operate the wiper.

1Intermittent (INT) – intermittent operation

(not adjustable)

2ON – continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward s

3to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

WIC0844

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-25

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the window and ob-

scure your vision. Warm the rear window

with the defroster before you wash the

rear window.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the reser-

voir tank is empty.

●Do not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at

full strength. Some methyl alcohol

based washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if spilled

while filling the window washer reser-

voir tank.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir

tank to mix the washer fluid concen-

trate and water.

To defrost the rear window glass and outside

mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and

push the rear window defroster switch on. The

rear window defroster indicator light comes on.

Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off

after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or dam-

age the rear window defroster.

Type A

LIC0782

Type B

LIC1173

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped)

DEFROSTER SWITCH

2-26 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

1When turning the switch to the posi-

tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and

instrument panel lights come on.

2When turning the switch to the posi-

tion, the headlights come on and all the other

lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Type A

LIC0560

Type B

LIC0687

Type C

LIC0688

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-27

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights to be

set so they turn on and off automatically. The

autolight system can:

●Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,

license plate and instrument panel lights au-

tomatically when it is dark.

●Turn off all the lights when it is light.

●Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after

you turn the key to OFF and all doors are

closed.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-

tion s

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the

headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a

door is opened and left open, the headlights

remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is

opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute

timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to

the OFF, ,or position. Be sure you do not put anything on top of

the autolight sensor s

1located on the top

side of the instrument panel. The autolight

sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-

ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is

dark out and the headlights will illuminate.

If this occurs while parked with the engine

off and the key in the ON position, your

vehicle’s battery could become discharged.

LIC0561 LIC0835

2-28 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Headlight beam select

1To select the high beam function, push the

lever forward. The high beam lights come on

and the light illuminates.

2Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the

headlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is turned OFF while the

headlight switch is in the or posi-

tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.

After the headlights automatically turn off with the

headlight switch in the or position,

the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes if

the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position

and then turned to the or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-

tomatically turns off the headlights after a

period of time, you should turn the head-

light switch to the OFF position when the

engine is not running to avoid discharging

the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-

duced intensity when the engine is started with

the parking brake released. The daytime running

lights operate with the headlight switch in the

OFF position or in the position. Turn the

headlight switch to the position for full

illumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is

started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-

nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when

the parking brake is released. The daytime run-

ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch

is turned off.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is

active, tail lights on your vehicle are not

on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your

headlights. Failure to do so could cause

an accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC0562

Instruments and controls 2-29

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

The instrument brightness control operates when

the headlight control switch is in

the , or AUTO position (with auto-

lights activated).

Turn the control s

Ato adjust the brightness of

instrument panel lights when driving at night.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

1Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-

pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

2To signal a lane change, move the lever up or

down to the point where the indicator light

begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch

to the position, then turn the fog light

switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch

in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-

lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to

the position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch

to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beams

selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog

lights automatically turn off when the high beam

headlights are selected.

WIC0917 LIC0563 LIC0393

2-30 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

●If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

●Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless

unusual circumstances force you to

drive so slowly that your vehicle might

become a hazard to other traffic.

●Turn signals do not work when the haz-

ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch

in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

To sound the horn, push the area near the horn

icons on the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the supplemental front air bag

system may result in serious personal

injury.

LIC0394 LIC0604

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH HORN

Instruments and controls 2-31

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The heated steering wheel system is designed to

operate only when the surface temperature of the

steering wheel is below approximately 68°F

(20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm

the steering wheel after the engine starts. The

indicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is

below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the

steering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C).

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, auto-

matically turning the heater on and off. The indi-

cator light will remain on as long as the switch is

on.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering

wheel off manually. The indicator light will go off.

NOTE:

The heated steering wheel switch is

equipped with a 30 minute timer. After the

switch has been activated for 30 minutes,

the system will automatically turn off. If the

surface temperature of the steering wheel

is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is

turned on, the system will not heat the

steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if

so equipped).

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as

desired, depending on the temperature. The

indicator light in the switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch

off.

LIC0421 LIC1041

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so

equipped) HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)

2-32 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CAUTION

●Do not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the

seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-

ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat

may become overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

heater.

●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a

dry cloth.

●When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-

lar materials.

●If any abnormalities are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the

switch off and have the system checked

by your NISSAN dealer.

●The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-

ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If

maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck

vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine

to turn ON the system. See “Vehicle dynamic control

(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

●Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehicle speed

when driving on steep downhill grades.

Always drive carefully when using the

hill descent control system and decel-

erate the vehicle speed by depressing

the brake pedal if necessary. Be espe-

cially careful when driving on frozen,

muddy or extremely steep downhill

roads. Failure to control vehicle speed

may result in a loss of control of the

vehicle and possible serious injury or

death.

WIC0534 LIC0743

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if

so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-33

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●The hill descent control may not control

the vehicle speed on a hill under all load

or road conditions. Always be prepared

to depress the brake pedal to control

vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-

sult in a collision or serious personal

injury.

CAUTION

When the hill descent control system op-

erates continuously for a long time, the

temperature of the brake pads may in-

crease and the hill descent control system

may be temporarily disabled (the indicator

light will blink). If the indicator light does

not come on continuously after blinking,

stop using the system.

The hill descent control system is designed to

reduce driver workload when going down steep

hills. The hill descent control system helps to

control vehicle speed so the driver can concen-

trate on steering the vehicle.

To activate the hill descent control system:

●the automatic transmission selector lever

must be in forward or reverse gear,

●the 4WD switch must be in the 4L position

and the vehicle speed must be under 15

mph (25 km/h) or

●the 4WD switch must be in the 4H position

and the vehicle speed must be under 21

mph (35 km/h), and

●the hill descent control system switch must

be ON.

The hill descent control indicator light will come

on when the system is activated. Also, the

stop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descent

control system applies the brakes to control ve-

hicle speed.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed

while the hill descent control system is on, the

system will stop operating temporarily. As soon

as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the

hill descent control system begins to function

again if the hill descent control operating condi-

tions are fulfilled.

The hill descent control indicator light blinks if the

switch is on and all conditions for system activa-

tion are not met or if the system becomes disen-

gaged for any reason.

To turn off the hill descent control system, push

the switch to the OFF position.

For additional information, see “Hill descent con-

trol system on indicator light” earlier in this sec-

tion and “Hill descent control system” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The power outlets are for powering electrical

accessories such as cellular telephones.

The bottom power outlet located on instrument

panel and the power outlet located in the cargo

area are powered directly by the vehicle’s battery.

The top power outlet (if so equipped) located on

the instrument panel and the power outlet lo-

cated inside the center console are powered only

when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON posi-

tion.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

Front row

WIC1268

POWER OUTLET

2-34 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CAUTION

●The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

●Only certain power outlets are designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do

not use any other power outlet for an

accessory lighter. See your NISSAN

dealer for additional information.

●Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window

defroster is on.

●Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

●When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water to contact the

outlet.

Center console

LIC0761

Luggage area

LIC0762

Instruments and controls 2-35

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays to

help prevent injury in an accident or sud-

den stop.

Top center tray (if so equipped)

WIC1277

Bottom center tray

WIC1269

Right-hand side 3rd row tray

WIC0830

STORAGE

2-36 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

STORAGE BINS

Front row bin

WIC1270

Left-hand side 3rd row bin (if so equipped)

LIC0776

Instruments and controls 2-37

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

2ND ROW UNDER-SEAT STORAGE

BIN

To access the under-seat storage bins:

1Tip up the 2nd row bench seat. Refer to “Tip

up for easy entry to the 3rd row” in the

“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section earlier in this

manual.

2Fold up the bottom cushion of the center

seat.

3Push the latch to release the storage bin

cover.

CONSOLE BOX

Pull up on the lever s

1to open the console box lid

LIC0875 LIC0766

2-38 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

GLOVE BOX

To open the top portion of the glove box, push the

latch s

Aup and raise the lid.

To open the lower portion of the glove box, pull

the handle s

Bdown and lower the lid.

Use the master key to lock or unlock the glove

box. The valet key cannot be used to lock or

unlock the glove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to

help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while

driving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

●Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

●Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

LIC0768 WIC0673

Instruments and controls 2-39

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

MAP POCKETS SEAT POCKETS

A pocket is located on the back of the driver’s

seat.

CUP HOLDERS

The front cup holders have adapters that can be

removed to accommodate larger cups.

WARNING

The cup holder should not be used while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

LIC0772 LIC0575 Front

WIC1271

2-40 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CAUTION

●Avoid abrupt starting and braking when

the cup holder is being used to prevent

spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it

can scald you or your passenger.

●Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the front

console), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid.

2nd row (rear of front console)

WIC0771

3rd row — Type A

LIC0773

Instruments and controls 2-41

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CAUTION

●Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in

the vehicle and possibly injure people

during sudden braking or an accident.

●Do not use bottle holder for open liquid

containers.

CARGO AREA STORAGE

To access the floor storage area, push down s

to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle s

to lift the luggage board.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo

with ropes or other types of straps.

3rd row — Type B

LIC0774

Bottle holder

LIC0784 LIC0777

2-42 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure

cargo.

●Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-

gage area. It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.

In a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

●The child restraint top tether strap may

be damaged by contact with items in

the cargo area. Secure any items in the

cargo area. Your child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in a collision if

the top strap is damaged.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

Side finisher

When hooking on ropes, do not apply a load of

more than 55 lb (245 N) to a single s

Ahook or 44

lb (196 N) to a single s

Bhook.

Floor hooks

Do not apply a load of more than 110 lb (490 N)

to a single hook.

WTI0125 LTI0126

Instruments and controls 2-43

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CARGO NETS

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seatbacks.

In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

●Be sure to secure all four hooks into the

retainers. The cargo restrained in the

net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or

the net may not stay secured.

The cargo nets help keep packages in the cargo

area from moving around while the vehicle is in

motion.

To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to the

retainers.

To remove the cargo net, detach the hooks from

the cargo net retainers.

WARNING

●The cargo restrained in the luggage

side nets must not exceed 8.5 lb (3.9 kg)

for each net or the net may not stay

secured.

●Do not place sharp objects in the lug-

gage side nets. Such objects may be-

come dangerous projectiles and cause

injury when the vehicle is moving or if

the vehicle is involved in a collision.

Large net (if so equipped)

LIC0778

Right-hand luggage side

net (if so equipped)

LIC0793

2-44 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

To install a luggage side net, attach the net to the

retainers. To remove, detach the net from the

retainers.

The lift gate net is not removable.

WARNING

●The cargo restrained in the lift gate net

must not exceed 2 lb (1 kg) or the net

may not stay secured.

●Do not place sharp objects in the lug-

gage side nets. Such objects may be-

come dangerous projectiles and cause

injury when the vehicle is moving or if

the vehicle is involved in a collision.

Left-hand luggage side net

LIC0794

Lift gate net

LIC0795

Instruments and controls 2-45

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

ROOF RACK

WARNING

●Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is

loaded at or near the cargo carrying

capacity, especially if the significant

portion of that load is carried on the

roof rack.

●Heavy loading of the roof rack has the

potential to affect the vehicle stability

and handling during sudden or abnor-

mal handling maneuvers.

●Roof rack load should be evenly

distributed.

●Do not exceed maximum roof rack load

weight capacity.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing items

from the roof rack. If you cannot comfort-

ably lift the items onto the roof rack from

the ground, use a ladder or stool.

WIC0914

2-46 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof

rack. Do not load more than 200 pounds (91 kg).

Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and

rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the

F.M.V.S.S. label (located on the driver’s door

pillar). For more information regarding GVWR

and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading information”

in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion later in this manual.

The front and rear cross bars (if so equipped) can

be adjusted or removed.

To adjust:

1. Loosen the 2 TorxThead fasteners s

Aon

both ends of the crossbar.

2. Remove the plugs at the desired position

C).

3. Slide the crossbar s

Bto the desired position

C) so that the holes in the crossbar line up

with the holes in the sidebar.

4. Tighten the 2 TorxThead fasteners on both

ends of the crossbar.

5. Reinstall the plugs at the previous position

6. Position your luggage on the crossbars and

secure the luggage with rope.

7. Always check the tightness of the TorxT

head fasteners.

To remove:

1. Loosen the 2 TorxThead fasteners s

Aon

both ends of the crossbar.

2. Remove the crossbar from the roof rack.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

●Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while

it is in motion and before closing the

windows. Use the window lock switch

to prevent unexpected use of the power

windows.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls and become

trapped in a window. Unattended chil-

dren could become involved in serious

accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignition

switch is in the ON position, or for about 45

seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the

OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door

is opened during this period of about 45 sec-

onds, power to the windows is canceled.

WINDOWS

Instruments and controls 2-47

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger’s side automatic

switch

4. Right rear passenger window switch

5. Left rear passenger window switch

6. Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped with

switches to open or close the front and rear

passenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold it

down. To close a window, pull the switch and

hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function

at any time, simply release the switch.

Front passenger’s power window

switch

The passenger’s window switch operates only

the corresponding passenger’s window. To open

the window, push the switch and hold it down s

To close the window, pull the switch up s

WIC1124 WIC1265

2-48 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or close

only the corresponding windows. To open the

window, push the switch and hold it down s

1.To

close the window, pull the switch up s

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock button is depressed, only

the driver’s side window can be opened or

closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock

function.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automatic

operation, press the window switch down to the

second detent and release it; it need not be held.

The window automatically opens all the way. To

stop the window, lift the switch up while the

window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic

operation, pull the switch up to the second detent

and release it; it need not be held.

Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated when

a window is closed by automatic operation, when

the ignition key is in the ON position or for 45

seconds after the ignition key is turned to the

OFF position.

If the control unit detects something caught in a

window equipped with automatic operation as it

is closing, the window will be immediately low-

ered.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto-reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window oc-

curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the window.

LIC0787 LIC0410

Instruments and controls 2-49

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF

The sunroof will only operate when the ignition

switch is in the ON position. The automatic sun-

roof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if

the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or OFF

position. If the driver’s door or the front passen-

ger’s door is opened during this period of about

45 seconds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

Sliding the sunroof

To fully open the sunroof, push the switch toward

DOWN/OPEN s

To fully close the sunroof, push the switch toward

UP/CLOSE s

To open or close the sunroof part way, push the

switch in any direction while the sunroof is sliding

to stop it in the desired position.

Tilting the sunroof

Close the sunroof by pushing the switch toward

UP/CLOSE s

2. Release the switch, then push

the UP/CLOSE switch again to tilt the sunroof

up.

To tilt the sunroof down, push the switch toward

DOWN/OPEN s

WARNING

●In an accident you could be thrown from

the vehicle through an open sunroof.

Always use seat belts and child

restraints.

●Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out of

the sunroof opening while the vehicle is

in motion or while the sunroof is

closing.

CAUTION

●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand

from the sunroof before opening.

●Do not place heavy objects on the sun-

roof or surrounding area.

Auto reverse function (when closing or

tilting down the sunroof)

The auto reverse function can be activated when

the sunroof is closed or tilted down by automatic

operation when the ignition key is in the ON

position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition

key is turned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the sunroof oc-

curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the sunroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in the

sunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof will

immediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in the

sunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immedi-

ately tilt up.

WIC0882

SUNROOF (if so equipped)

2-50 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re-

peats opening or tilting up the sunroof, keep

pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds

after it happens; the sunroof will fully close gradu-

ally. Make sure nothing is caught in the sunroof.

WARNING

●In an accident you could be thrown from

the vehicle through an open sunroof.

Always use seat belts and child

restraints.

●Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out of

the sunroof opening while the vehicle is

in motion or while the sunroof is

closing.

CAUTION

●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand

from the sunroof before opening.

●Do not place heavy objects on the sun-

roof or surrounding area.

Sunshade

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-

ward or backward.

If the sunroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the

sunroof.

The interior lights have a three-position switch

and operate regardless of ignition switch posi-

tion.

When the switch is in the ON position s

1, the

interior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-

tion. The lights will go off after about 30 minutes

unless the ignition key is in the ACC or ON

position.

Type A

LIC0789

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Instruments and controls 2-51

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

When the switch is in the O position s

2, the

interior lights will stay on for about 30 seconds

when:

●The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key

or the power door lock switch while all doors

are closed and the ignition switch is in the

OFF position.

●The driver’s door is opened and then closed

while the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

●The key is removed from the ignition switch

while all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer is

activated when:

●The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a

key, or the power door lock switch.

●The ignition switch is turned ON.

The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min-

utes while doors are open to prevent the battery

from becoming discharged.

When the switch is in the OFF position s

3, the

interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door

position.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

To turn the personal lights on, press the switches.

To turn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

Type B

LIC0792 LIC0790

PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)

2-52 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To

turn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three-

position switch. To operate, push the switch to

the desired position.

ON: The light is illuminated.

Normal (center) position: The light illuminates

when any door is opened or unlocked by the

keyfob. The light turns off after 30 seconds when

all doors are closed.

OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless of

door position or lock status.

The HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver provides a

convenient way to consolidate the functions of up

to three individual hand-held transmitters into

one built-in device.

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver:

●Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)

devices such as garage doors, gates, home

and office lighting, entry door locks and se-

curity systems.

●Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the vehi-

cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-

nected, HomeLinkTwill retain all program-

ming.

Once the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver

is programmed, retain the original trans-

mitter for future programming procedures

(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon

sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver buttons

should be erased for security purposes. For

additional information refer to “Program-

ming HomeLinkT” later in this section.

LIC0791 LIC0590

MAP LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT HOMELINKTUNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-53

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WARNING

●Do not use the HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and re-

verse features as required by federal

safety standards. (These standards be-

came effective for opener models

manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-

rage door opener which cannot detect

an object in the path of a closing garage

door and then automatically stop and

reverse, does not meet current federal

safety standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features in-

creases the risk of serious injury or

death.

●During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will

open and close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people or

objects are clear of the garage door,

gate, etc. that you are programming.

●Your vehicle’s engine should be turned

off while programming the HomeLinkT

Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT

1. To begin, press and hold the two outer

HomeLinkTbuttons (to clear the memory)

until the indicator light s

1blinks (after 20

seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter

1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLinkTsurface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold both the HomeLinkTbutton you want to

program and the hand-held transmitter but-

ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has

been completed.

WIC0986 WIC0987

2-54 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator

light on the HomeLinkTflashes, changing

from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing

blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.

When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both

buttons may be released. The rapidly flash-

ing light indicates successful programming.

To activate the garage door or other pro-

grammed device, press and hold the pro-

grammed HomeLinkTbutton — releasing

when the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkTblinks

rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,

HomeLinkThas picked up a “rolling code”

garage door opener signal. You will need to

proceed with the next steps to train the

HomeLinkTto complete the programming

which may require a ladder and another per-

son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-

gram button located on the garage door

opener’s motor to activate the “training

mode”. This button is usually located near

the antenna wire that hangs down from the

motor. If the wire originates from under a

light lens, you will need to remove the lens to

access the program button.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released the

program button on the garage door open-

er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you

have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.

Use the help of a second person for conve-

nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-

ing the garage door opener program button,

quickly and firmly press and release the

HomeLinkTbutton you’ve just programmed.

Press and release the HomeLinkTbutton up

to 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLinkTbutton should now be pro-

grammed. (To program the remaining

HomeLinkTbuttons for additional door or

gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to

“clear” all previously programmed

HomeLinkTbuttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty

programming your HomeLinkTbuttons, refer to

the HomeLinkTweb site at: www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKTFOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-

held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-

onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to

HomeLinkT, continue to press and hold the

HomeLinkTbutton (note steps2-4under “Pro-

gramming HomeLinkT”) while you press and re-

press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every

2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly

(indicating successful programming).

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,

etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-

ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-

sible damage to the garage door opener

components.

OPERATING THE HOMELINKT

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver (once pro-

grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-

rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-

propriate programmed HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver button. The red indicator light will

illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

Instruments and controls 2-55

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLinkTdoes not quickly learn the hand-

held transmitter information:

●replace the hand-held transmitter batteries

with new batteries.

●position the hand-held transmitter with its

battery area facing away from the

HomeLinkTsurface.

●press and hold both the HomeLinkTand

hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-

ruption.

●position the hand-held transmitter1-3

inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLinkTsurface. Hold the transmitter in

that position for up to 15 seconds. If

HomeLinkTis not programmed within that

time, try holding the transmitter in another

position – keeping the indicator light in view

at all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,

please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs

Department. The phone numbers are located in

the Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,

to clear all programming, press and hold the two

outside buttons and release when the indicator

light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINKTBUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver

button, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkTbut-

ton. Do not release the button until step 4

has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash

slowly (after 20 seconds), position the

hand-held transmitter1-3inches (26 - 76

mm) away from the HomeLinkTsurface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter

button.

4. The HomeLinkTindicator light will flash, first

slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator

light begins to flash rapidly, release both

buttons.

The HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver button has

now been reprogrammed. The new device can

be activated by pushing the HomeLinkTbutton

that was just programmed. This procedure will

not affect any other programmed HomeLinkT

buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the

codes of any non-rolling code device that has

been programmed into HomeLinkT. Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-

facturer or dealer of those devices for additional

information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLinkTUniver-

sal Transceiver with your new transmitter

information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part 15

and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-

terference and (2) This device must accept

any interference that may be received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation.

2-56 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

This transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D. CV2V67690

Instruments and controls 2-57

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

2-58 Instruments and controls

MEMO

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

Intelligent keys (if so equipped) ..................3-2

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys ..........3-3

Doors ............................................3-4

Locking with key................................3-4

Locking with inside lock knob ....................3-5

Locking with power door lock switch .............3-5

Child safety rear door lock.......................3-6

Intelligent Key system (if so equipped) ...............3-6

Operating range................................3-8

Door locks/unlocks precaution ...................3-8

Intelligent Key operation .........................3-9

How to use the remote keyless entry

function ......................................3-12

Warning signals ...............................3-14

Troubleshooting guide .........................3-14

Remote keyless entry system ......................3-16

How to use remote keyless entry system .........3-16

Hood ...........................................3-20

Lift gate .........................................3-20

Lift gate release ...............................3-21

Glass hatch......................................3-21

Fuel-filler door ...................................3-22

Opening the fuel-filler lid .......................3-22

Fuel-filler cap .................................3-22

Steering wheel ...................................3-24

Tilt operation..................................3-24

Pedal position adjustment (if so equipped) ..........3-24

Sun visors .......................................3-25

Vanity mirrors .................................3-25

Mirrors ..........................................3-26

Rearview mirror (if so equipped).................3-26

Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ...............................3-26

Outside mirrors ...............................3-28

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) ..........3-29

Memory storage function .......................3-29

Entry/exit function .............................3-31

System operation..............................3-31

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-

der chip and chrome NISSAN brand

symbol on one side

2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip

3. Key number plate

4. Transponder chip

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose

your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by

using the key number. NISSAN does not record

key numbers so it is very important to keep track

of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer

can duplicate it.

1. Two Intelligent Keys

2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent

Keys)

3. Key number plate

INTELLIGENT KEYS (if so equipped)

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent

Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-

ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System components. As many

as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used

with one vehicle. The new keys must be regis-

tered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the

Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Im-

mobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the reg-

WPD0128 LPD0350

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

istration process requires erasing all memory in

the Intelligent Key components when registering

new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that

you have to the NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key,

which can be used in case of a discharged bat-

tery.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock

knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into

the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to

the lock position.

The mechanical key can be used for operation in

the same way as an ordinary key.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed

in the Intelligent Key slot.

Valet hand-off

When you have to leave a key with a valet, give

them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-

chanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box or console box from

being opened during valet hand-off, follow the

procedure below.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-

gent Key.

2. Lock the glove box or console box with the

mechanical key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and

keep the mechanical key with you.

See “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls”

section.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the master

or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your

vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in

the key head.

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the glove box

lock.

To protect belongings when you leave a key with

someone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-

cate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used

with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to

your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-

cause the registration process will erase the

memory of all key codes previously registered

into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.

After the registration process, these components

will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.

Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time

of registration will no longer be able to start your

vehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which

contains an electrical transponder, to come into

contact with salt water. This could affect system

function.

WARNING

●Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat belts,

this provides greater safety in the event

of an accident by helping to prevent

persons from being thrown from the

vehicle. This also helps keep children

and others from unintentionally open-

ing the doors, and will help keep out

intruders.

●Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock or

unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front s

1of the vehicle

locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear s

2of the

vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,

returning the key to neutral s

3(where the key can

only be removed and inserted) and turning it

toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks

all doors s

Driver’s side

LPD0240

DOORS

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position s

1, then close the

door.

To unlock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the unlock position s

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door

lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side), to

the lock position s

1. When locking the door this

way, be certain not to leave the key inside the

vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s

side) to the unlock position s

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver’s or

front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock

position with the key in the ignition and any door

open, all doors will lock and then unlock auto-

matically. This helps to prevent the keys from

being accidently locked inside the vehicle.

Inside lock

LPD0298

Door lock switch

WPD0381

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors

from being opened accidentally, especially when

small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the

edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the lock position, the

door can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect elec-

tric medical equipment. Those who use a

pacemaker should contact the electric

medical equipment manufacturer for the

possible influences before use.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the

door locks using the remote controller function or

pushing the request switch on the vehicle without

taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The

operating environment and/or conditions may af-

fect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when operating the vehicle.

●Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with

the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-

ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.

Environmental conditions may interfere with the

operation of the Intelligent Key system under the

following operating conditions.

●When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such as

a TV tower, power station and broadcasting

station.

●When in possession of wireless equipment,

such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,

and CB radio.

●When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or

covered by metallic materials.

●When any type of radio wave remote control

is used nearby.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal com-

puter.

●When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions

before using the Intelligent Key function or use

the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending

on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is

approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-

charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-

ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blink

green for about 30 seconds after the ignition

switch is turned to the ON position.

LPD0299

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving

radio waves, if the key is left near equipment

which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-

nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-

tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-

tery, see “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

Because the steering wheel is locked electrically,

unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition

switch in the LOCK position is impossible when

the vehicle battery is completely discharged. Un-

locking the steering wheel is impossible even if

the Intelligent Key is inserted into the ignition

switch. Pay special attention that the vehicle bat-

tery is not completely discharged.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered

and used with one vehicle. For information about

the purchase and use of additional Intelligent

Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

●Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-

gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the

unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate

the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing

procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range from the request switch s

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

strong radio waves are present near the operat-

ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-

ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent

Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)

from each request switch s

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,

handle or rear bumper, the request switches may

not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even someone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the

request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

●Do not push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as

illustrated. The close distance to the door

handle will cause the Intelligent Key system

to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-

gent Key is outside the vehicle.

●After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely locked

by testing them.

●To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the

key with you and then lock the doors.

SPA2038 WPD0375

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Do not pull the door handle before pushing

the door handle request switch. The door

will be unlocked but will not open. Release

the door handle once and pull it again to

open the door.

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking

the key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you

can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door

handle request switch within the range of opera-

tion.

Locking doors

1. Move the selector to the P (Park) position,

push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion and make sure you carry the Intelligent

Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch s

1or

2while carrying the Intelligent Key with

you.

4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and

the outside buzzer sounds twice.

WRS0806 WRS0807

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

NOTE:

●Doors lock with the door handle request

switch while the ignition switch is not in the

LOCK position.

●Doors do not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch while any door is

open. However, doors lock with the me-

chanical key even if any door is open.

●Doors do not lock with the door handle

request switch with the Intelligent Key inside

the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.

However, when an Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-

other Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

●After locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure that the doors

have been securely locked by operating

the door handles or the rear liftgate

opener switch.

●When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the

Intelligent Key in your possession be-

fore operating the request switch to

prevent the Intelligent Key from being

left in the vehicle.

●The request switch is operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been de-

tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-

dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection

is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doors

are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put

inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;

the lock will automatically unlock and the door

buzzer sounds.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not function

under the following conditions:

●When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the glove box or a storage bin.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the door pockets.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side or near metallic materials.

WRS0808 WPD0430

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The lockout protection may function when

the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle

but it is too close to the vehicle.

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch s

1or

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the

outside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch s

1or

2again within 5 seconds to unlock all

doors.

If a door or the liftgate handle is pulled while

unlocking the doors, that door or liftgate may not

be unlocked. Returning the handle to its original

position will unlock the door or liftgate. If the door

or liftgate does not unlock after returning the

handle, push the door handle request switch to

unlock the door and liftgate.

All doors and the liftgate will be locked automati-

cally unless one of the following operations is

performed within 1 minute after pushing the re-

quest switch.

●Opening any door or the liftgate.

●Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds

when a door is unlocked and the room light

switch is in the DOOR position.

WRS0807 WRS0808

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The interior light can be turned off without waiting

for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-

ing operations.

●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

●Locking the doors with the remote controller.

●Switching the room light switch to the OFF

position.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE

KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can operate all

door locks using the remote keyless function of

the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function

can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away

from the vehicle. The operating distance de-

pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-

tion under the following conditions:

●When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.

●When the doors or the rear liftgate are open

or not closed securely.

●When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in

the vehicle.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push the button on the Intelligent

Key.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and

the horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

WPD0430 WPD0359

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure that the doors have been

securely locked by operating the door

handles.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the button on the Intelligent Key.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Push the button again within 5 sec-

onds to unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within 1

minute after pushing the button.

●Opening any doors.

●Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for 30 seconds when

a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in

the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting for 30

seconds by performing one of the following op-

erations.

●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

●Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.

●Switching the room light switch to the OFF

position.

Opening windows (if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows

equipped with automatic operation simulta-

neously.

●To open the windows, press the but-

ton on the Intelligent Key longer than 3

seconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressing

the button on the Intelligent Key.

The door windows cannot be closed by

using the Intelligent Key.

WPD0360

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the panic alarm to call attention

by pushing and holding the button on the

Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25

seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

●it has run for 25 seconds, or

●any button is pushed on the Intelligent Key.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-

vated using the Intelligent Key.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times to

confirm that the horn beep feature has been

deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds

once more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the

horn will sound once to confirm that the horn

beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-

lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-

pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent

Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being

stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and

outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in

the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is

displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the

Intelligent Key.

See the troubleshooting guide that follows and

“Vehicle information display indicator lights and

warnings” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are

programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent

Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle

system may respond differently than expected.

WPD0374 WPD0362

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch to stop

the engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-

play and the inside warning chime sounds

continuously.

The selector lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Shift the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

When opening the driver’s door to get out

of the vehicle

The inside warning chime sounds

continuously. The ignition switch is in the ACC position. Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

When closing the door after getting out of

the vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on the

display, the outside chime sounds 3 times

and the inside warning chime sounds for

approximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-

play and the outside chime sounds

continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position

and the selector lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Move the selector lever to the P (Park) po-

sition and push the ignition switch to the

OFF position.

When closing the door with the inside lock

knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately

3 seconds and all the doors unlock. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle request

switch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately

2 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

The door handle request switch is pushed

before the door is closed.

Push the door handle request switch after

the door is closed.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on the

interior lights, and activate the panic alarm by

using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,

can be adjusted. For vehicles without navigation

system, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature”

later in this section. For vehicles with navigation

system, refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in

the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and

audio systems” section later in this manual.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle

before locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance of

approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The

effective distance depends upon the conditions

around the vehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one

vehicle. For information concerning the purchase

and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

●the battery is discharged.

●the distance between the vehicle and the

keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate when the

key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the keyfob:

●Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.

●Do not drop the keyfob.

●Do not strike the keyfob sharply against

another object.

●Do not place the keyfob for an extended

period in an area where temperatures

exceed 140°F (60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-

ommends erasing the ID code of that key-

fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-

authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For

information regarding the erasing proce-

dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood and all doors.

4. Push the button on the keyfob. All

the doors lock. The hazard warning lights

flash twice and the horn beeps once to

indicate all doors are locked.

LPD0209

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●When the button is pushed with all

doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash

twice and the horn beeps once as a re-

minder that the doors are already locked.

●If a door is open and you push the

button, the doors will lock but the horn will

not beep and the hazard warning lights will

not flash.

The horn may or may not beep. For vehicles

without navigation system, refer to “Silencing the

horn beep feature” later in this section. For ve-

hicles with navigation system, refer to “Comfort &

convenience settings” in the “Display screen,

heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec-

tion later in this manual. Unlocking doors

Push the button on the keyfob once.

●Only the driver’s door unlocks.

●The hazard warning lights flash once if all

doors are completely closed with the ignition

key in any position except the ON position.

●The interior lights turn on and the light timer

activates for 30 seconds when the interior

light switch is in the DOOR position with the

ignition key in any position except the ON

position.

Push the button on the keyfob again within

5 seconds.

●All doors unlock.

●The hazard warning lights flash once if all

doors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-

ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the

ignition and turning to the ON or START position,

locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the

interior light switch to the off position.

Auto relock

When the button on the keyfob is pushed,

all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute

unless one of the following operations is per-

formed:

●Any door is opened.

●A key is inserted into the ignition switch and

the key is turned from OFF to ON.

LPD0210

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Opening windows (if so equipped)

The keyfob allows you to open the front windows

simultaneously.

●To open the front windows, press the

button on the keyfob for longer than 3

seconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressing

the button on the keyfob.

The door windows cannot be closed by

using the keyfob.

Linking the keyfob to automatic drive

positioner memory

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive

positioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memory

setting.

See “Automatic drive positioner” later in this sec-

tion.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the panic alarm to call attention

by pushing and holding the button on the

keyfob for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25

seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

●it has run for 25 seconds, or

●any button is pushed on the keyfob.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-

vated using the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep and lamp flash

feature with the keyfob, the display screen

(if so equipped) will not show the current

mode and cannot be used to change the

mode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-

vious mode and re-enable the display

screen control.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

LPD0211 LPD0262

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The hazard warning lights will flash three times to

confirm that the horn beep feature has been

deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds

once more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the

horn will sound once to confirm that the horn

beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-

lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the panic alarm to call attention

by pushing and holding the button on the

keyfob for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25

seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

●it has run for 25 seconds, or

●any button is pushed on the keyfob.

Using the interior lights

Push the button on the keyfob once to turn

on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”

in the “Instruments and controls”section earlier in

this manual.

LPD0211

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1Pull the hood lock release handle located

below the driver’s side instrument panel. The

hood will spring up slightly.

2Push the lever at the front of the hood to the

side as illustrated with your fingertips and

raise the hood.

3Insert the support rod into the slot on the

underside of the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make

sure it locks into place.

WARNING

●Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. Fail-

ure to do so could cause the hood to fly

open and result in an accident.

●If you see steam or smoke coming from

the engine compartment, to avoid injury

do not open the hood.

WARNING

●Always be sure the lift gate has been

closed securely to prevent it from open-

ing while driving.

●Do not drive with the lift gate open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases

to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-

haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

●Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-

fore closing the lift gate.

LPD0302

HOOD LIFT GATE

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The power door lock system allows you to lock or

unlock all doors including the lift gate simulta-

neously.

To open the lift gate, press the hatch release

switch under the license finisher to release the

latch. Pull the lift gate open.

To close, lower and gently push the lift gate

down. The power latch will engage to securely

latch the lift gate.

LIFT GATE RELEASE

If the lift gate cannot be locked or unlocked with

the door lock switch or the keyfob due to a

discharged battery, follow these steps:

1. Remove the cover on the inside of the lift

gate.

2. Move the lever up to lock or down to unlock.

To open, pull up on the smaller outside handle to

release the glass hatch, then pull up on the glass

hatch. To close, lower and push the glass hatch

down securely.

LPD0300 LPD0251 LPD0301

GLASS HATCH

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

NOTE:

The lift gate must be unlocked in order to

open the glass hatch.

WARNING

Do not drive with the glass hatch open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust gases

to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust

gas” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER LID

Pull on the finger tab to open.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the

cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn

the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are

heard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder s

1while

refueling.

WPD0436 LPD0253

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WARNING

●Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seriously

injured if it is misused or mishandled.

Always stop the engine and do not

smoke or allow open flames or sparks

near the vehicle when refueling.

●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling may

cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel

spray and possibly a fire.

●Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a

built-in safety valve needed for proper

operation of the fuel system and emis-

sion control system. An incorrect cap

can result in a serious malfunction and

possible injury. It could also cause the

malfunction indicator light to come on.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body to

attempt to start your vehicle.

●Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable fuel

containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are fill-

ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-

tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

●If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

●Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.

Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the mal-

function indicator light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

●For additional information, see the

“Malfunction indicator light (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and Controls” section

earlier in this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

TILT OPERATION

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the

steering wheel up or down to the desired posi-

tion.

Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel

in place.

The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad-

justed for driving comfort.

Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust the

brake and accelerator pedal position forward s

or backward s

2. Pedal adjustment can only be

performed when:

●Ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC posi-

tion

●Ignition switch is ON and the selector lever

is in the P (Park) position

The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad-

justed separately.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the pedal position with your

foot on the pedal.

LPD0304 LPD0305

STEERING WHEEL PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT (if so

equipped)

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1To block glare from the front, swing down the

main sun visor.

2To block glare from the side, remove the

main sun visor from the center mount and

swing the visor to the side.

3Slide the extension sun visor in or out as

needed.

CAUTION

●Do not store the sun visor before return-

ing the extension to its original

position.

●Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-

edly downward.

VANITY MIRRORS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor

down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity

mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the

mirror cover is open.

WPD0315

WPD0307

SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The night position s

1reduces glare from the

headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position s

2when driving in daylight

hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-

cally dims according to the intensity of the head-

lights of the vehicle following you. The automatic

anti-glare feature operates only when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

The indicator light s

1will illuminate when the

automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors

2or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.

Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the

sensors, resulting in improper operation. Type A

To turn off the anti-glare feature, push and hold

the button for about 8 seconds. The indi-

cator light will turn off.

To turn on the anti-glare feature again, push and

hold the button for about 8 seconds. The

indicator light will turn on.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the button as described in the chart below

to activate various features of the automatic anti-

glare review mirror.

WPD0126 Type A

WPD0331

MIRRORS

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Push and hold

the

button for about:

Feature:

(Push button again for about 1 sec-

ond to change settings)

1 second Compass/outside temperature dis-

play toggles on/off (if so equipped)

8 seconds Automatic anti-glare/indicator light

toggles on/off

11 seconds

Compass zone can be changed to

correct false compass readings (if

so equipped)

13 seconds Compass enters calibration mode (if

so equipped)

For more information about the compass and

outside mirror features (if so equipped), refer to

“Compass and outside temperature display” in

the “Instruments and controls” section. Type B

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press

the button. The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, press

the button again. The indicator light will

turn on.

For information on HomeLinkTUniversal Trans-

ceiver operation, see “HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver” in the “Instrument and controls”sec-

tion of this manual.

For information on the compass and outside tem-

perature display, see “Compass and outside

temperature display” in the “Instrument and con-

trols” section of this manual.

Type B

WPD0333

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operate

only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Move the small switch s

1to select the right or left

mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position

using the large switch s

WARNING

●Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

You could lose control of your vehicle

and cause an accident.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,

defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-

tional information, see “Rear window and outside

mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the

“Instrument and controls” section of this manual.

Foldable outside mirrors

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so

equipped)

The reverse tilt-down feature will turn the se-

lected outside mirror surface downward to pro-

vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

turn the outside mirror control switch to the left or

right position. Only one mirror can be selected at

a time.

LPD0237 LPD0259

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Move the shift selector lever to R (Reverse). The

selected mirror will turn downward.

The selected mirror surface will return to its origi-

nal position when any of the following have oc-

curred:

●The shift selector lever is moved to any po-

sition other than R (Reverse).

●The outside mirror control switch is set to the

N (Neutral) position.

●The ignition switch is turned OFF.

NOTE:

If the outside mirror control switch is in the

neutral position, neither mirror will turn

downward when the shift selector lever is

moved to R (Reverse).

For more information regarding this feature and

how to save the R (Reverse) mirror tilt-down

adjustment in the automatic drive positioner

memory, refer to “Automatic drive positioner”later

in this section.

The automatic drive positioner system has two

features:

●Memory storage function

●Entry/exit function

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, accelerator

and brake pedals, and outside mirrors can be

stored in the automatic drive positioner memory.

Follow these procedures to use the memory sys-

tem.

1. Set the automatic transmission selector le-

ver to the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

LPD0306

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if

so equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator and

brake pedals, and outside mirrors to the

desired positions by manually operating

each adjusting switch. For additional infor-

mation, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section and “Pedal position adjust-

ment” and “Outside mirrors” earlier in this

section.

During this step, do not turn the ignition to

any position other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,

push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at

least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memory

switch will come on and stay on for approxi-

mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.

After the indicator light goes off, the se-

lected positions are stored in the selected

memory (1 or 2).

If a new memory is stored in the same memory

switch, the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking a keyfob to a stored memory

position

Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory

position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-

ing procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-

tion.

2. While the indicator light for the memory

switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-

onds, press the button on the keyfob.

The indicator light will blink. After the indica-

tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that

memory setting.

With the key removed from the ignition switch,

press the button on the keyfob. The driv-

er’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and out-

side mirrors will move to the memorized position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is saved to the

memory switch, the keyfob automatically

re-links.

Confirming memory storage

●Turn the ignition ON and push the SET

switch. If the main memory has not been

stored, the indicator light will come on for

approximately 0.5 seconds. When the

memory has stored the position, the indica-

tor light will stay on for approximately 5 sec-

onds.

●If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the memory storage function will

be canceled and must be restarted before a

stored memory position can be set again.

Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to

restart the memory storage function. You

can also restart the memory storage function

using the following procedure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace the

fuse.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more than

two times with the ignition key in the LOCK

position.

Once the memory storage function has been

restarted, you can store a memory position.

See “Memory storage function”earlier in this

section.

Selecting the memorized position

Set the shift selector lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion, then:

●Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’s

door, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully

for at least 1 second, or

●Turn the ignition switch to the ON position

and push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for

at least 1 second.

The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals,

and outside mirrors will move to the memorized

position with the indicator light blinking, and then

the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s seat

will automatically move when the shift selector

lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the

driver to get into and out of the driver’s seat more

easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward:

●When the key is removed from the ignition

switch and the driver’s door is opened.

●When the driver’s door is opened with the

ignition key turned to LOCK.

●When the ignition key is turned from ACC to

LOCK with the driver’s door open.

The driver’s seat will return to the previous posi-

tion:

●When the key is inserted into the ignition

switch and the driver’s door is closed.

●When the driver’s door is closed with the key

turned to LOCK.

●When the key is turned from ACC to ON

while the shift selector lever is in the P (Park)

position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-

celed. For vehicles with navigation system, see

“Comfort & convenience settings” in the “Display

screen, heater, air conditioner and audio sys-

tems” section of this manual. For vehicles without

navigation system, see your NISSAN dealer.

Restarting the entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse

opens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.

Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to

restart the entry/exit function. You can also restart

the entry/exit function using the following proce-

dure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace the

fuse.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more than

two times with the ignition key in the LOCK

position.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will not

work or will stop operating under the following

conditions:

●When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7

km/h).

●When any of the memory switches are

pushed while the automatic drive positioner

is operating.

●When the adjusting switch for the driver’s

seat is turned on while the automatic drive

positioner is operating.

●When the memory switch (1 or 2) is not

pushed and held for at least 1 second.

●When the seat has been already moved to

the memorized position.

●When no seat position is stored in the

memory switch.

●When the shift selector lever is moved from

P (Park) to any other position.

●When the driver’s door remains open more

than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is

not in the ON position.

The automatic drive positioner system can be

adjusted and canceled. For vehicles with naviga-

tion system, see “Comfort & convenience set-

tings” in the “Display screen, heater, air condi-

tioner and audio systems” section of this manual.

For vehicles without navigation system, see your

NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems

Control panel buttons — color screen without

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..................4-2

How to use the NISSAN controller ...............4-3

How to select menus on the screen ..............4-4

How to use the STATUS button ..................4-4

How to use the INFO button .....................4-4

How to use the SETTING button .................4-9

OFF button .............................4-15

Control panel buttons — color screen with

Navigation System (if so equipped) .................4-16

How to use the NISSAN controller ..............4-17

How to use the touch screen ...................4-17

Start-up screen ...............................4-19

How to select menus on the screen .............4-19

How to use the STATUS button .................4-20

How to use the INFO button ....................4-20

How to use the SETTING button ................4-25

OFF button .............................4-33

Rearview monitor (if so equipped) ..................4-33

How to read the displayed lines .................4-33

Adjusting the screen ...........................4-34

Operating tips.................................4-34

Ventilators .......................................4-35

Heater and air conditioner (manual).................4-36

Controls......................................4-37

Heater operation ..............................4-38

Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) ........4-39

Air flow charts.................................4-40

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ..............4-44

Automatic operation ...........................4-44

Manual operation ..............................4-45

Operating tips.................................4-45

Rear seat air conditioner ..........................4-46

Controls......................................4-47

Servicing air conditioner...........................4-47

Audio system ....................................4-47

Radio ........................................4-47

FM radio reception ............................4-48

AM radio reception ............................4-48

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) .........4-48

Audio operation precautions ....................4-49

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player

(if so equipped) ...............................4-54

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

changer (if so equipped) .......................4-59

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player (if so equipped) .........................4-67

CompactFlash™ (CF) player operation

(if so equipped) ...............................4-72

Music Box hard-disk drive audio system

(if so equipped) ...............................4-74

CD/CF (CompactFlash™) care and cleaning......4-83

Steering wheel switch for audio control ..........4-85

Remote audio system controls

(if so equipped) ...............................4-86

Antenna ......................................4-87

NISSAN mobile entertainment system (MES)

(if so equipped) ..................................4-88

Digital video disc (DVD) player controls ..........4-89

Remote control................................4-90

Flip-down screen..............................4-90

Before operating the DVD mobile

entertainment system ..........................4-92

Playing a digital versatile disc (DVD) .............4-93

Remote control operation.......................4-98

Care and maintenance ........................4-100

How to handle the DVD .......................4-101

Car phone or CB radio...........................4-103

BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System with

Navigation System (if so equipped) ................4-104

Voice commands .............................4-106

Pairing procedure ............................4-107

Phonebook ..................................4-109

Making a call.................................4-110

Receiving a call ..............................4-111

During a call .................................4-112

Phone setting................................4-112

NISSAN Voice Recognition System

(if so equipped) .................................4-114

Command list ................................4-114

Using the system .............................4-123

System features ..............................4-125

Voice command learning function...............4-126

Voice recognition settings .....................4-129

Troubleshooting guide ........................4-131

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WARNING

●Positioning of the heating or air condi-

tioning controls and display controls

should not be done while driving in or-

der that full attention may be given to

the driving operation.

●Do not disassemble or modify this sys-

tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,

fire, or electrical shock.

●Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or

lack of sound. Continued use of the

system may result in accident, fire or

electric shock.

●In case you notice any foreign object in

the system hardware, spill liquid on it,

or notice smoke or smell coming from

it, stop using the system immediately

and contact your nearest NISSAN

dealer. Ignoring such conditions may

lead to accidents, fire or electrical

shock.

1. NISSAN controller (P. 4-3)

2. STATUS button (P. 4-4)

3. + (brightness control) button

4. OFF brightness control button

(P. 4-15)

5. INFO button (P. 4-4)

6. – (brightness control) button

7. SETTING button (P. 4-9)

8. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-3)

WHA0881

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR

SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—arosenma

When you use this system, make sure the engine

is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will discharge the battery, and the

engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button — This is a button on the control

panel.

“Display”key — This is a select key on the screen.

By selecting this key you can proceed to the next

function.

HOW TO USE THE NISSAN

CONTROLLER

Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on

the display screen. Select an item on the display

using the main directional buttons s

2or the

center dial s

3. Then press the ENTER button s

to select the item or perform the action.

The BACK button s

4button has two functions:

●Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the BACK button s

4during setup,

the setup will be canceled and/or the display will

return to the previous screen.

●Finish setup.

In some screens pressing the BACK button s

accepts the changes made during setup.

WHA0883

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE

SCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-

play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-

tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different

areas on the screen provide you with important

information. See the following for details.

1. Header:

Shows the path used to get to the current

screen (for example, press the SETTING

button > then select the “Audio” key).

2. Menu Selections:

Shows the options to choose within that

menu screen (for example, Bass, etc.).

3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:

Shows that the NISSAN controller may be

used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and

select more options.

4. Screen Count:

Shows the number of menu selections avail-

able for that screen (for example, 5/6).

5. Footer/Information Line:

Provides more information (if available)

about the menu selection currently high-

lighted (for example, Enhances stereo imag-

ing and sound).

HOW TO USE THE STATUS

BUTTON

To display the status of the audio, climate control

system and fuel consumption, press the STATUS

button.

The following information will appear when the

STATUS button is pressed:

Audio →Audio and climate control system →

Audio, climate control temperature settings, av-

erage fuel economy and distance to empty →

Audio

HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON

Press the INFO button; the display screen shows

vehicle information for your convenience.

The information shown on the screen should be a

guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.

See the following for details.

LHA0914 LHA0915

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Fuel economy

Press the INFO button then select the “Fuel

Economy” key using the NISSAN controller and

press the ENTER button to display Average Fuel

Economy, Distance to Empty and Fuel Economy

Record.

Distance to empty (MI or km)

The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can be

driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly

calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel

tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display

is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level

is low, the DTE display will change to (*).

NOTE:

●If the amount of fuel added while the

ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-

play just before the ignition switch is

turned OFF may continue to be dis-

played.

●When driving uphill or rounding curves,

the fuel in the tank shifts, which may

momentarily change the display.

Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based

on fuel consumption since the last reset. The

display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3

mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting the

battery cables, the display might show (**.*).

Resetting fuel economy

The average fuel economy calculation can be

reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the

“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset” key

using the NISSAN controller and press the EN-

TER button.

Fuel economy record

Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel

Economy” key, then select the “View” key using

the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER

button.

The average fuel consumption history will be

displayed in a graph form along with the average

fuel for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.

LHA0921 LHA0922

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Tire pressure information

To display tire pressure information, press the

INFO button, then select the “Tire Pressure” key

using the NISSAN controller and press the EN-

TER button.

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-

cates that the pressure is being measured. After

a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will

be displayed randomly.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed on

the screen does not correspond with the actual

order of the tire position.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the

heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling condition

and the temperature.

In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-

played on the screen:

LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, tire pressure will not be

indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) will not function and

the low tire pressure warning light will

flash for approximately 1 minute. The

light will remain on after 1 minute. Con-

tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

Trip computer

Press the INFO button, then select the “Trip

Computer” key using the NISSAN controller and

press the ENTER button.

The trip computer will display the following items:

●Elapsed Time – Journey time since the last

reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59

minutes.

●Driving Distance – Distance driven (mile or

km) since the last reset.

●Average Speed – Average speed driven

(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.

LHA0923 LHA0924

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Resetting the trip computer

Each item in the trip computer can be reset to 0.

Select the “Reset” key on the item that needs to

be reset using the NISSAN controller and press

the ENTER button.

To reset all of the items in the trip computer select

the “Reset ALL” key and press the ENTER button.

A confirmation screen will appear. Select the

“Yes” key and press the ENTER button.

Maintenance items

Press the INFO button and select the “Mainte-

nance” key using the NISSAN controller and

press the ENTER button; the maintenance infor-

mation will be displayed on the screen.

Changing the maintenance interval

Select one of the “Reminder (1 – 4)” keys using

the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER

button to display the screen to change the main-

tenance interval.

Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN con-

troller and press the ENTER button. Use the

NISSAN controller to change the maintenance

interval; to accept the changes press the BACK

button.

LHA0925 LHA0926

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Resetting the maintenance interval

To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0

miles (km), select the “Reset Distance” key using

the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER

button.

Displaying the maintenance notice re-

minder

Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key and press

the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE

INFORMATION automatically at the set mainte-

nance interval. The indicator light will illuminate

when it is ON.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au-

tomatically displayed as shown when both of the

following conditions are met:

●The vehicle is driven the set distance and the

ignition key is turned OFF.

●The ignition key is turned ON the next time

the vehicle will be driven.

To return to the previous display after the MAIN-

TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press

the BACK button.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays

each time the key is turned ON until one of the

following conditions are met:

●The “Reset” key is selected.

●The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set to

OFF (indicator light not illuminated).

●The maintenance interval is set again.

LHA0839

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

HOW TO USE THE SETTING

BUTTON

When the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-

TINGS screen will appear on the display. You can

select and/or adjust several functions, features

and modes that are available for your vehicle. Use

the NISSAN controller to select each item to be

set and press the ENTER button.

Display settings

Select the “Display” key and press the ENTER

button. The Display settings screen will appear.

Type A

LHA0927

Type B

WHA0937 LHA0929

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Brightness/contrast:

Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key

to adjust the brightness or contrast of the map

background. Use the NISSAN controller to adjust

the brightness to darker or brighter and the con-

trast to lower or higher.

The new settings are automatically saved when

you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK

button or any other mode button.

Display off:

Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the

“Display ON” turns amber and the message

above will be displayed briefly. When the audio,

HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode

button on the control panel is operated, the dis-

play turns on for that operation. If one of the

control panel buttons is pressed, the display will

not automatically turn off until that operation is

finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-

matically after 5 seconds.

To turn the screen on:

●Press the SETTING button and select the

“Display” key and then select the “Display

ON”key. Then set the screen to on by press-

ing the ENTER button, or

●Hold the OFF button for approxi-

mately 2 seconds and the message “resum-

ing display”will appear and the “Display ON”

key will be automatically turned on (no am-

ber indicator).

Background color

Select the “Background Color” key; the display

color changes between day and night.

The new settings are automatically saved when

you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK

button or any other mode button.

LHA0930 WHA0823

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Beeps settings

Select the “Beeps” key and press the ENTER

button. The Beeps settings screen will appear.

With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a

beep will sound if any control panel button is

pressed.

Clock

The following display will appear after pressing

the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”

key using the NISSAN controller and pressing

the ENTER button.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-

nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper

right corner of the screen.

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12h (12 hour) clock display or

the 24h (24 hour) clock display.

Daylight Savings Time:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-

nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the

daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the

amber indicator light will disappear.

LHA0931 LHA0932

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Time Zone:

Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone

screen will appear.

Select one of the following zones, depending on

the current location, by selecting the correct time

zone key and pressing the ENTER button to

enable that time zone (indicator light will illumi-

nate for that location).

●Pacific

●Mountain

●Central

●Eastern

●Atlantic

●Newfoundland

●Aleutian

●Hawaii

●Alaska

Clock Adjust:

Adjust the time by manually inputting the correct

time.

●0–9:

Select to change the number in the display.

●Modify:

Select to change the number at the cursor

position.

●>:

Select to move the cursor position to the

right.

●<:

Select to move the cursor position to the left.

LHA0933 LHA0943

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●OK:

Select to accept the changes made and

return to the clock setting display.

After selection/settings, press the BACK button

or any other mode button to accept the changes.

Comfort & Convenience settings (if so

equipped)

Select the “Comfort & Conv.” key by using the

NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but-

ton. The comfort and convenience option screen

will be displayed.

You can set the following operating conditions by

selecting the desired item using the NISSAN

controller, then pressing the ENTER button. The

indicator light, box at the left of the selected item,

alternately turns on and off each time the ENTER

button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

LHA1015 LHA1016

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Auto interior illumination: Select to turn on or

turn off the illumination of the interior lights when

any door is unlocked.

Speed sensing wiper interval: Select to turn

on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati-

cally according to the vehicle speed.

Remote key response horn: Select to turn on

or turn off the horn chirp mode used when the

LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lamp

flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will

not be changed with the display. Use the

keyfob to return to the previous mode and

re-enable the display control.

Remote key response lights: Select to turn on

or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode used

when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the key-

fob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lamp

flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will

not be changed with the display. Use the

keyfob to return to the previous mode and

re-enable the display control.

Auto re-lock time: Select to set the length of

time before doors automatically re-lock.

Selective door unlock: When this item is

turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first

after the door unlock operation. When the door

handle request switch on the driver’s or front

passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,

only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All

the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock

operation is performed again within 5 seconds.

When this item is turned to off, all the doors will

be unlocked after the door unlock operation is

performed once.

Reset all settings to default: Select to

change all the comfort and convenience systems

to their default settings.

Language / Units

Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Lan-

guage / Units” key and press the ENTER button.

Select which setting you want to change using

the NISSAN controller and selecting either the

“Select Language” key or the “Select Units” key

by pressing the ENTER button.

LHA0934

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Select Language:

Select the “English” key, the “Français”key or the

“Español” key to change the language shown on

the display.

Select Units:

Select the “US” (Mile, °F, MPG) key or the “Met-

ric” (km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units

shown on the display.

Audio settings

For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” later in

this section.

OFF BUTTON

To change the display brightness, press

the OFF button. Pressing the button again

will change the display to the day or the

night display. Then, adjust the brightness

by using the NISSAN controller.

The display brightness can also be adjusted us-

ing the + (brighter) button or the 2(dimmer)

button.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, the

display will return to the previous display.

Press and hold the OFF button for more

than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the

button again to turn the display on.

LHA0935 LHA0936

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. STATUS button (P. 4-20)

2. DEST button*

3. NISSAN controller (P. 4-17)

4. PHONE button**

5. OFF brightness control button

(P. 4-33)

6. INFO button (P. 4-20)

7. SETTING button (P. 4-25)

8. VOICE button*

9. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-17)

10. ROUTE button*

11. ZOOM IN button*

12. MAP button*

13. ZOOM OUT button*

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to

the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

**For information on the PHONE button, see

“BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System with

Navigation System” later in this section.

When you use this system, make sure the engine

is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will discharge the battery, and the

engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button — This is a button on the control

panel.

“Display”key — This is a select key on the screen.

By selecting this key, you can proceed to the next

function.

LHA0880

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —

COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

HOW TO USE THE NISSAN

CONTROLLER

Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on

the display screen. Select an item on the display

using the main directional buttons s

2(certain

Navigation System functions use the additional

directional buttons s

6) or the center dial s

Then press the ENTER button s

1to select the

item or perform the action.

The BACK button s

4button has two functions:

●Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the BACK button s

4during setup,

the setup will be canceled and/or the display will

return to the previous screen.

●Finish setup.

In some screens pressing the BACK button s

accepts the changes made during setup.

For the VOICE button s

5functions, refer to the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH

SCREEN

CAUTION

●The glass screen on the liquid crystal

display may break if it is hit with a hard

or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do

not touch the liquid crystalline material,

which contains a small amount of mer-

cury. In case of contact with skin, wash

immediately with soap and water.

●To clean the display, never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any

kind of solvent or paper towel with a

chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

●Do not splash any liquid such as water

or car fragrance on the display. Contact

with liquid will cause the system to

malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-

not be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not available

while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-

ate the navigation system.

LHA0882

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Touch screen operation

With this system, the same operations as those

for the NISSAN controller are possible using the

touch screen operation.

Selecting the item:

Touch an item to select. To select the “Audio” key,

touch the “Audio” key s

1on the screen. Touch

the “BACK” key s

2to return to the previous

screen.

Adjusting the item:

Touch the “+” key s

1or the “2” key s

2to adjust

the settings. Touch the “UP”key s

3to scroll up to

the previous page, or touch the “DOWN” key s

to scroll down to next page.

Inputting characters:

Touch the letter or number key s

There are some options available when inputting

characters.

●Uppercase:

Shows uppercase characters.

●Lowercase:

Shows lowercase characters.

●Space:

Inserts a space.

WHA0885 WHA0887 WHA0889

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Symbols:

Shows symbols such as the question mark

(?).

●Delete:

Deletes the last character that has been

input with one touch. Touch and hold the

“Delete” key to delete all of the characters.

●OK:

Completes the character input.

Touch screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a

small amount of neutral detergent with a soft

cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-

tergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the

screen.

START-UP SCREEN

When you push the ignition switch to the ACC or

ON position, the SYSTEM START-UP warning is

displayed on the screen. When you read and

agree with the warning, press the ENTER button.

If you do not push the ENTER button, you will not

be able to use the navigation system.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE

SCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-

play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-

tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different

areas on the screen provide you with important

information. See the following for details.

1. Header:

Shows the path used to get to the current

screen (for example, press the SETTING

button > then select the “Comfort & Conv.”

key).

2. Menu Selections:

Shows the options to choose within that

menu screen (for example, Auto Interior Illu-

mination, etc.).

3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:

Shows that the NISSAN controller may be

used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and

select more options.

4. Screen Count:

Shows the number of menu selections avail-

able for that screen (for example, 1/14).

5. Footer/Information Line:

Provides more information (if available)

about the menu selection currently high-

lighted (for example, Cabin lighting when

unlocking doors).

LHA0890

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

HOW TO USE THE STATUS

BUTTON

To display the status of the audio, climate control

system, fuel consumption and navigation system,

press the STATUS button.

The following information will appear when the

STATUS button is pressed:

Audio →Audio and Climate control system →

Audio, climate control temperature settings, av-

erage fuel economy and distance to empty →

Audio, climate control temperature settings and

Navigation System →Audio

HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON

Press the INFO button; the display screen shows

vehicle and navigation information for your con-

venience.

The information shown on the screen should be a

guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.

See the following for details.

Fuel economy

Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel

Economy” key using the NISSAN controller and

press the ENTER button to display Average Fuel

Economy, Distance to Empty and Fuel Economy

Record.

Distance to empty (MI or km)

The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can be

driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly

calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel

tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display

is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level

is low, the DTE display will change to (*).

LHA0892 LHA0893

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

NOTE:

●If the amount of fuel added while the

ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-

play just before the ignition switch is

turned OFF may continue to be dis-

played.

●When driving uphill or rounding curves,

the fuel in the tank shifts, which may

momentarily change the display.

Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based

on fuel consumption since the last reset. The

display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3

mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting the

battery cables, the display might show (**.*).

Resetting fuel economy

The average fuel economy calculation can be

reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the

“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset” key

using the NISSAN controller and press the EN-

TER button.

Fuel economy record

Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel

Economy” key, then select the “View” key using

the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER

button.

The average fuel consumption history will be

displayed in a graph form along with the average

fuel for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.

Tire pressure information

To display tire pressure information, press the

INFO button, then select the “Tire Pressure” key

using the NISSAN controller and press the EN-

TER button.

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-

cates that the pressure is being measured. After

a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will

be displayed randomly.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed on

the screen does not correspond with the actual

order of the tire position.

LHA0894 LHA0895

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the

heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling condition

and the temperature.

In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-

played on the screen:

LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, tire pressure will not be

indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) will not function and

the low tire pressure warning light will

flash for approximately 1 minute. The

light will remain on after 1 minute. Con-

tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

Trip computer

Press the INFO button, then select the “Trip

Computer” key using the NISSAN controller and

press the ENTER button.

The trip computer will display the following items:

●Elapsed Time – Journey time since the last

reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59

minutes.

●Driving Distance – Distance driven (miles or

km) since the last reset.

●Average Speed – Average speed driven

(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.

Resetting the trip computer

Each item in the trip computer can be reset to 0.

Select the “Reset” key on the item that needs to

be reset using the NISSAN controller and press

the ENTER button.

To reset all of the items in the trip computer select

the “Reset ALL” key and press the ENTER button.

A confirmation screen will appear; select the

“Yes” key and press the ENTER button.

LHA0896

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Maintenance items

Press the INFO button and select the “Mainte-

nance” key using the NISSAN controller and

press the ENTER button; the maintenance infor-

mation will be displayed on the screen.

Changing the maintenance interval

Select one of the “Reminder (1 – 4)” keys using

the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER

button to display the screen to change the main-

tenance interval.

Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN con-

troller and press the ENTER button. Use the

NISSAN controller to change the maintenance

interval, to accept the changes, press the BACK

button.

Resetting the maintenance interval

To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0

miles (km), select the “Reset Distance” key using

the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER

button.

LHA0897 LHA0898

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Displaying the maintenance notice re-

minder

Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key and press

the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE

INFORMATION automatically at the set mainte-

nance interval. The indicator light will illuminate

when it is ON.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au-

tomatically displayed as shown when both of the

following conditions are met:

●The vehicle is driven the set distance and the

ignition key is turned OFF.

●The ignition key is turned ON the next time

the vehicle will be driven.

To return to the previous display after the MAIN-

TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press

the BACK button.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays

each time the key is turned ON until one of the

following conditions are met:

●The “Reset” key is selected.

●The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set to

OFF (indicator light not illuminated).

●The maintenance interval is set again.

Other items

Press the INFO button and select the “Others”

key using the NISSAN controller and press the

ENTER button to view information on the naviga-

tion and voice recognition systems.

LHA0839 LHA0908

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Voice recognition

If you use the voice recognition system for the

first time or you do not know how to operate it,

you can display the voice command list or the

user guide for confirmation. For more information,

see “NISSAN voice recognition system” later in

this section.

Command List:

Displays a list of voice commands that will work

with the system.

User Guide:

Displays a simplified operation manual of the

voice recognition system and how to use the

voice commands.

Navigation version

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

Traffic Info.

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

Where am I?

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

GPS Satellite Info.

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual for information regarding this item. HOW TO USE THE SETTING

BUTTON

When the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-

TINGS screen will appear on the display. You can

select and/or adjust several functions, features

and modes that are available for your vehicle. Use

the NISSAN controller to select each item to be

set and press the ENTER button.

LHA0899 LHA0884

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Display settings

Select the “Display” key and press the ENTER

button. The Display settings screen will appear.

Brightness/contrast:

Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key

to adjust the brightness or contrast of the map

background. Use the NISSAN controller to adjust

the brightness to darker or brighter and the con-

trast to lower or higher.

The new settings are automatically saved when

you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK

button or any other mode button.

Display off:

Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the

“Display ON” turns amber and the message

above will be displayed briefly. When the audio,

HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode

button on the control panel is operated, the dis-

play turns on for that operation. If one of the

control panel buttons is pressed, the display will

not automatically turn off until that operation is

finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-

matically after 5 seconds.

LHA0901 LHA0902 WHA0823

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

To turn the screen on:

●Press the SETTING button and select the

“Display” key and then select the “Display

ON”key. Then set the screen to on by press-

ing the ENTER button, or

●Hold the OFF button for approxi-

mately 2 seconds and the message “resum-

ing display”will appear and the “Display ON”

key will be automatically turned on (no am-

ber indicator).

Background color

Select the “Background Color” key; the display

color changes between day and night.

The new settings are automatically saved when

you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK

button or any other mode button.

Clock

The following display will appear after pressing

the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”

key using the NISSAN controller and pressing

the ENTER button.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-

nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper

right corner of the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost exactly

because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12h (12 hour) clock display or

the 24h (24 hour) clock display.

Offset Adjust:

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per

minute.

Daylight Savings Time:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-

nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the

daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the

amber indicator light will disappear.

LHA0904

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Time Zone:

Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone

screen will appear.

Select one of the following zones, depending on

the current location, by selecting the correct time

zone key and pressing the ENTER button to

enable that time zone (indicator light will illumi-

nate for that location).

●Pacific

●Mountain

●Central

●Eastern

●Atlantic

●Newfoundland

●Hawaii

●Alaska

After selection/settings, press the BACK button

or any other mode button to accept the changes.

Comfort & Convenience settings

Select the “Comfort & Conv.” key by using the

NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but-

ton. The comfort and convenience option screen

will be displayed.

You can set the following operating conditions by

selecting the desired item using the NISSAN

controller, then pressing the ENTER button. The

indicator light, box at the right of the selected

item, alternately turns on and off each time the

ENTER button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

LHA0905 LHA0938

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF Auto interior illumination: Select to turn on or

turn off the illumination of the interior lights when

any door is unlocked.

Auto headlights sensitivity: Select to adjust

the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher

(right) or lower (left).

Auto headlights off delay: Select to change

the duration of the automatic headlight off timer

from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 second

periods.

Speed sensing wiper interval: Select to turn

on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati-

cally according to the vehicle speed.

Remote key response horn: Select to turn on

or turn off the horn chirp mode used when the

LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lamp

flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will

not be changed with the display. Use the

keyfob to return to the previous mode and

re-enable the display control.

Remote key response lights: Select to turn on

or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode used

when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the key-

fob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lamp

flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will

not be changed with the display. Use the

keyfob to return to the previous mode and

re-enable the display control.

Auto re-lock time: Select to set the length of

time before doors automatically re-lock.

Selective door unlock: When this item is

turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first

after the door unlock operation. When the door

handle request switch on the driver’s or front

passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,

LHA0939 LHA0940

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All

the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock

operation is performed again within 5 seconds.

When this item is turned to off, all the doors will

be unlocked after the door unlock operation is

performed once.

Intelligent Key lock / unlock: Select to turn

on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by

pushing the door handle request switch.

Intelligent Key lock reply: Select to change

the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when

a door handle request switch is pushed.

Select to turn off all sounds made when a door

handle request switch is pushed, by selecting the

“OFF” key.

Slide driver seat back on exit: Select to turn

on or turn off the driver’s seat moving backwards

for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF

position and the driver’s door is opened. After

getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition

switch to the ACC position, the driver’s seat

moves to the previous position.

Reset all settings to default: Select to

change all the comfort and convenience systems

to their default settings.

Others settings

Select the “Others” key by using the NISSAN

controller and pressing the ENTER button. Voice

recognition, language and units setting screen

will be displayed.

Voice Recognition:

Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Voice

Recognition” key and press the ENTER button;

the following options will be displayed:

●Command List

Displays the voice command list on the

screen.

●Minimize Voice Feedback

When this item is turned to ON, vocal feed-

back is reduced if the voice recognition sys-

tem is activated.

LHA0909 LHA0910

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Voice Command Learning

Select this item to have the NISSAN Voice

Recognition system learn the user’s voice.

The system can memorize the voices of up to

three persons. For the details of this func-

tion, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition

system” later in this section.

●User Guide

Select this item to learn the operation flow of

the NISSAN Voice Recognition system with

the help of a step-by-step guide.

Language / Units

Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Lan-

guage / Units” key and press the ENTER button.

Select which setting you want to change using

the NISSAN controller and selecting either the

“Select Language” key or the “Select Units” key

by pressing the ENTER button.

Select Language:

Select the “English” key or the “Français” key to

change the language shown on the display.

LHA0911 LHA0912

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Select Units:

Select the “US” (Mile, °F, MPG) key or the “Met-

ric” (km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units

shown on the display.

Audio settings

For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” later in

this section.

Navigation settings

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual for information regarding these set-

tings.

Volume and beeps settings

Navigation volume

For navigation volume settings refer to the sepa-

rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for infor-

mation regarding these settings.

Phone volume

For phone volume settings refer to “BluetoothT

Hands-Free Phone System With Navigation Sys-

tem” later in this section.

Beep setting

With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a

beep will sound if any control panel button is

pressed.

Phone settings

For phone settings refer to “BluetoothTHands-

Free Phone System With Navigation System”

later in this section.

LHA0913 WHA0903

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

OFF BUTTON

To change the display brightness, press

the OFF button. Pressing the button again

will change the display to the day or the

night display. Then, adjust the brightness

by using the NISSAN controller.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, the

display will return to the previous display.

Press and hold the OFF button for more

than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the

button again to turn the display on.

When the selector lever is shifted into the R

(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows the

view directly to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING

●The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in detecting large stationary ob-

jects to help avoid damaging the ve-

hicle. The system will not detect small

objects below the bumper, and may not

detect objects close to the bumper or

on the ground.

●The rearview camera is a convenience

but it is not a substitute for proper back-

ing. Always turn and check that it is safe

to do so before backing up. Always

back up slowly.

●Objects viewed in the rearview monitor

differ from actual distance because a

wide-angle lens is used.

●Make sure that the lift gate is securely

closed when backing up.

●Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled beside the license plate light.

●When washing the vehicle with high-

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a mal-

function, fire or an electric shock.

●Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-

function or cause damage resulting in a

fire or an electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera.

Do not scratch the cover when cleaning

dirt or snow from the cover.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and

distances to objects with reference to the

bumper line s

Aare displayed on the monitor.

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so

equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

They are indicated as reference distances to

objects. The lines and colors in the display indi-

cate distances from the back bumper line s

Ain

the illustration.

11.5 feet (0.5 m) red

23 feet (1 m) yellow

37 feet (2 m) green

410 feet (3 m) green

The vehicle clearance lines are wider than

the actual clearance.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

To adjust the quality of the screen, press the

SETTING button.

●To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,

Tint, Color, Contrast, and Black Level of the

rearview monitor, press the SETTING button

with the rearview monitor on, then touch one

of the adjustment keys. Press the “–” or “+”

key on the item and adjust the level.

●Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tint

and Color of the rearview monitor while the

vehicle is moving.

OPERATING TIPS

●When the selector lever is shifted to R (Re-

verse), the monitor screen automatically

changes to the rearview monitor mode.

However, the radio can be heard.

●It may take some time until the rearview

monitor is displayed after the selector lever

has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects

may be distorted momentarily until the rear-

view monitor screen is displayed completely.

When the selector lever is returned to a

position other than R (Reverse), it may take

some time until the screen changes. Objects

on the screen may be distorted until they are

completely displayed.

●When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not clearly display ob-

jects. This is not a malfunction.

●When strong light directly enters the cam-

era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

●Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the

screen. This is due to strong reflected light

from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

●The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light. This is not a malfunction.

LHA0437 LHA1021

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●The colors of objects on the rearview moni-

tor may differ somewhat from those of the

actual object.

●When the contrast of objects is low at night,

pressing the SETTING button may not

change the brightness.

●Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a

dark place or at night.

●If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,

the rearview monitor may not display ob-

jects. Clean the camera.

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to

clean the camera. This will cause discolora-

tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent

and then wipe with a dry cloth.

●Do not damage the camera as the monitor

screen may be adversely affected.

●Do not use body wax on the camera window.

Wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-

ened with mild detergent diluted with water.

LHA0488

VENTILATORS

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Adjust air flow direction for the driver and pas-

senger side windowss

1, driver and passenger

front s

2centers

3, rear passenger compartment

4and rear center console (if so equipped) ven-

tilatorss

5by moving the ventilator slide and/or

ventilator assemblies.

WARNING

●The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

rear center console ventilators

(if so equipped)

WHA0510

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual)

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. Fan control dial

2. Temperature control dial

3. Air flow control dial

4. Air conditioner button (if so equipped)

5. Rear window defroster button (if so

equipped)

6. Air recirculation button (if so equipped)

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and

controls fan speed.

Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select the

air flow outlets.

MAX

A/C

— Air flows from center and side

vents with maximum cooling (air

conditioning if so equipped).

— Air flows from center and side

ventilators.

— Air flows from center and side

ventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outlets

and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defroster

outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjust

the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the

temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase

the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

ON position (Indicator light on):

Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Push the button to the on position when:

●driving on a dusty road.

●to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-

senger compartment.

●for maximum cooling when using the air con-

ditioner.

OFF position (Indicator light off):

Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-

ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-

ditioner operation.

LHA0489

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Air conditioner button (if so

equipped)

The button is provided only on vehicles equipped

with an air conditioner.

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the

desired (1 - 4) position and push the

button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator

light comes on when the air conditioner is oper-

ating. To turn off the air conditioner, push

the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch (if so

equipped)

For more information about the rear window de-

froster switch, see “Rear window defroster

switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot

outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost

outlets.

1. Push the button to the off position for

normal heating.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side and

center ventilators.

1. Push the button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to

defrost/defog the windows.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

●To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-

dows, turn the fan control dial to 4 and the

temperature control lever to the full HOT

position.

●When the position is selected, the air

conditioner automatically turns on (however,

the indicator light will not illuminate) if the

outside temperature is more than 36°F

(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-

tinue to operate until the fan control dial is

turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even

if the air flow control dial is turned to a

position other than the position. This

dehumidifies the air which helps defog the

windshield. The mode automatically

turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn

into the passenger compartment to further

improve the defogging performance.

Bi-level heating

This mode directs cooler air from the side and

center vents and warmer air from the floor outlets.

When the temperature control dial is moved to

the full hot or full cool position, the air between

the vents and the floor outlets is the same tem-

perature.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. Push the button (if so equipped) to

the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-

shield.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the

hot position.

●When the position is selected, the air

conditioner automatically turns on (however,

the indicator light will not illuminate) if the

outside temperature is more than 36°F

(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-

tinue to operate until the fan control dial is

turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even

if the air flow control dial is turned to a

position other than the position. This

dehumidifies the air which helps defog the

windshield. The mode (if so

equipped) automatically turns off, allowing

outside air to be drawn into the passenger

compartment to further improve the defog-

ging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades

and air inlet in front of the windshield. This

improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (if

so equipped)

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the

desired (1 - 4) position, and push in the

button to activate the air conditioner. When the

air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying

functions are added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-

ates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Push the button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Push the button. The indicator light

comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

●For quick cooling when the outside tem-

perature is high, push the button to

the on position (indicator light on). Be sure

to return the button to the off position

for normal cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.

1. Push the button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

4. Push the button. The indicator light

comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—arosenma

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows and

dehumidify the air.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the

position.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-

tion.

3. Push the button. The indicator light

comes on.

When the or are selected, the air

conditioner automatically turns on (however, the

indicator light will not illuminate) if the outside

temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). The air

conditioning system will continue to operate until

the fan control dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle

is shut off, even if the air flow control dial is turned

to a position other than the position. This

dehumidifies the air which helps defog the wind-

shield. The mode automatically turns off,

allowing outside air to be drawn into the passen-

ger compartment to further improve the defog-

ging performance.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position.

Operating tips

●Keep the windows and sunroof (if so

equipped) closed while the air conditioner is

in operation.

●After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3

minutes with the windows open to vent hot

air from the passenger compartment. Then,

close the windows. This allows the air con-

ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

●The air conditioning system should be

operated for approximately 10 minutes

at least once a month. This helps pre-

vent damage to the system due to lack

of lubrication.

●A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air

is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

●If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature over the normal range, turn

the air conditioner off. See “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The following charts show the button and dial

positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,

cooling or defrosting. For additional information

on heating and cooling see “Heater and air con-

ditioner” in this section”. The air recirculation

() button should always be in the OFF

position for heating and defrosting.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WHA0780 WHA0781

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WHA0782 WHA0783

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WHA1063

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. Driver temperature control dial/AUTO

button

2. A/C ON/OFF button

3. Fan speed control (increase)

4. Front window defroster button

5. MODE button

6. Passenger temperature control dial/

DUAL button

7. System OFF

8. Fan speed control (decrease)

9. Rear window defroster button

10. Air recirculation button

WARNING

●The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls to

activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)

This mode may be normally used all year round as

the system automatically works to keep a con-

stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan

speed are also controlled automatically.

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be

displayed.)

2. Turn the driver’s side temperature control

dial to the left or right to set the desired

temperature. Driver and passenger tem-

peratures can be set independently. Press

DUAL to activate dual climate control func-

tions. Turn the passenger’s side temperature

control dial to the left or right to set the

desired passenger’s temperature.

●Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F

(24°C) for normal operation.

LHA0859

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(automatic)

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off

are also controlled automatically.

●A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air

is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Push the defroster control button to

turn the system on. The display will show the

defrost icon.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right

to set the desired temperature.

●To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

windows, press the fan control speed button

until it reaches the maximum speed .

●As soon as possible after the windshield is

clean, push the AUTO button to return to the

auto mode.

●When the defroster control button is

activated, the air conditioner will automati-

cally be turned on at outside temperatures

above 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for

more than one minute, the air conditioning

system will continue to operate until the fan

control is turned OFF, the vehicle is shut off,

or the A/C button is pressed even if the air

flow MODE control button is used to select a

position other than the position. This

dehumidifies the air which helps defog the

windshield. The air recirculation mode auto-

matically turns off, allowing outside air to be

drawn into the passenger compartment to

further improve the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control buttons

Press the fan speed control buttons +/–

to manually control the fan speed.

Press OFF to turn the system off.

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic

control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

The mode automatically turns off, allowing

outside air to be drawn into the passenger com-

partment to prevent fogging.

Push the air recirculation button to recir-

culate interior air inside the vehicle. Push the

AUTO button to return to automatic mode.

The air recirculation button will not be activated

when the air conditioner is in DEF, floor, or

floor/defrost mode.

Air flow control

Pushing the MODE button manually controls air

flow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and side

ventilators.

— Air flows from center and side

ventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system off

Press the OFF button.

OPERATING TIPS

●When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flow

from the foot outlets may not operate for a

maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is

not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-

ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets

will operate normally.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The sunload sensor s

1, located on the top center

of the instrument panel, helps the system main-

tain a constant temperature. Do not put anything

on or around this sensor.

Rear seat temperature and fan speed can be

controlled from both the front seat overhead con-

sole controls or the rear seat controls (on back of

center console).

Press the REAR CTRL button to transfer control

of the rear climate functions to the rear passen-

ger’s.

To operate the rear air conditioner, the engine

must be running.

If the rear seat fan control dial is set to (0), the air

conditioner is turned off. If it is set to any of the fan

speed positions, air is discharged from the rear

vents at the corresponding speed.

1. Rear fan speed control dial.

2. Rear temperature control dial.

LIC0835 LHA0628

REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the rear vent fan on and

off, and controls fan speed.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows rear passen-

gers to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-

hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with

the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-

quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-

tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants

will cause severe damage to your air conditioner

system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant

and lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni-

cal and consumer information” section of this

manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-

mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

personal injury, any air conditioner ser-

vice should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with proper equipment.

RADIO

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position

and press the VOL (volume)/ON·OFF (power)

knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio

with the engine not running, the key should be

turned to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-

ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality

normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-

hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-

dio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-

ity of that reception.

However there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the finest equipment is used. These char-

acteristics are completely normal in a given re-

ception area, and do not indicate any malfunction

in your NISSAN radio system.

WHA0630

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Reception conditions will constantly change be-

cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other ve-

hicles can work against ideal reception. De-

scribed below are some of the factors that can

affect your radio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30

miles (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single chan-

nel) FM having slightly more range than stereo

FM. External influences may sometimes interfere

with FM station reception even if the FM station is

within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM

signal is directly related to the distance between

the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a

line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same

characteristics as light. For example, they will

reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position

(usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter) static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the

treble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected

signals reach the receiver at the same time. The

signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-

mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmitter

to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so

equipped)

When the satellite radio is first installed or the

battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may

not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait

more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and

the vehicle outside of any metal or large building

for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary

data.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an

optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-

stalled and an XMTsatellite radio service sub-

scription is active. Satellite radio is not available

in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio

signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite

antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can

affect satellite radio performance. Remove the

ice to restore satellite radio reception

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

●Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD

and/or CD changer/player.

●Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or CD

changer.

●Only one CD can be loaded into the CD

player at a time.

●Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

●During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-

midity. If this occurs, remove the CD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

●The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

●The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high or low.

Decrease/increase the temperature

before use.

●Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

●CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with finger-

prints may not work properly.

●The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

●Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

●Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

●Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

●Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion:

●3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

●CDs that are not round

●CDs with a paper label

●CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

●This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capability to

record or burn CDs.

●If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

LHA0099

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CHECK DISC:

●Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

●Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-

perature inside the player. Remove the

CD by pressing the EJECT button. After

a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD

can be played when the temperature of

the player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-

tem (only MP3 CD).

CompactFlash™ (CF) player

●Do not force a CF card into the slot. This

could damage the CF card and/or player.

●During cold weather or rainy days, the player

may malfunction due to the humidity. If this

occurs, remove the CF card and dehumidify

or ventilate the player completely.

●The CF player sometimes cannot function

when the passenger compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-

perature before use.

●Do not expose a CF card to direct sunlight.

●Confirm that a CF card is inserted correctly.

Compact Disc (CD)/CompactFlash™

(CF) with MP3 or WMA

Terms:

●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track from CD/CF can reduce the file

size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling:

44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no

perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compres-

sion removes the redundant and irrelevant

parts of a sound signal that the human ear

doesn’t hear.

●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a

compressed audio format created by Mi-

crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

●Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is called

a multisession.

●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, album title,

encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.

ID3 tag information is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* WindowsTand Windows MediaTare regis-

tered trademarks and trademarks of the Mi-

crosoft Corporation in the United States of

America and/or other countries.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CompactFlash™ is a trademark of the SanDiskT

Corporation in the United States of America

and/or other countries.

Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD/CF with MP3 or

WMA files is as illustrated.

●The names of folders not containing MP3 or

WMA files are not shown in the display.

●If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

●The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software.

Therefore, the files might not play in the

desired order.

Playback order chart WHA0773

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, CF

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

CompactFlash card: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels

With navigation system:

Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Without navigation system:

Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation With navigation system: 128 characters

Without navigation system: 64 characters

Displayable character codes*3 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:

UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.

Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names

and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applica-

tions or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.

It takes a relatively long time

before the music starts

playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts

playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the

specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate

files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to the

next song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the

player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in

the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. PRESET A·B·C button

2. CD eject button

3. MENU button

4. CD insert slot

5. CD button

6. FM·AM button

7. TUNE buttons

8. RPT button

9. Power/VOL control knob

10. RDM button

11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

12. SEEK buttons

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see 9Audio opera-

tion precautions9earlier in this section.

Power button and VOL control knob

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,

then press the power button. If you listen to the

radio with the engine not running, turn the key to

the ACC position. The mode (radio or CD) that

was playing immediately before the system was

turned off resumes playing.

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.

Pressing the power button again turns the sys-

tem off.

Turn the VOL control knob to the right to increase

volume or to the left to decrease volume.

MENU button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE, BAL-

ANCE and CLOCK):

Press the MENU button to change the mode as

follows:

BAS →TRE →FAD →BAL →CLOCK →Audio

or OFF →BAS

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press

the MENU button until the desired mode appears

in the display. Press the SEEK button to adjust

Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also

LHA0858

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

use the SEEK button to adjust Fader and Balance

modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between

the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts

the sound between the right and left speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly

until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-

wise, the radio or CD display will automatically

reappear after about 10 seconds.

NOTE:

If the clock is enabled, pressing the MENU

button will change the mode as follows:

BAS →TRE →FAD →BAL →CLOCK →

Hour adjustment →Minute adjustment →

Audio or OFF →BAS

For more information on setting the clock, see

“Clock set” later in this section.

Clock operation

Press the MENU button until CLOCK is dis-

played; use the SEEK button to turn the clock

display on (CLK ON) or off (CLK OFF).

Clock set

If the clock is not displayed with the ignition

switch in the ACC or ON position, you need to

select the CLK ON mode. Press the MENU but-

ton repeatedly until CLOCK is displayed. Use the

SEEK button to enable CLK ON mode.

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until

CLOCK mode appears; press the SEEK

button until CLK ON appears.

2. Press the MENU button again; the hours will

start flashing.

3. Press the SEEK button or to

adjust the hour.

4. Press the MENU button again; the display

will switch to the minute adjustment mode.

5. The minutes will start flashing. Press SEEK

button or to adjust the minutes.

6. Press the MENU button again to exit the

clock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock display

after 10 seconds, or press the MENU button

again to return to the regular clock display.

Resetting the time

Hold the MENU button down and then press the

TUNE/SEEK button; the time will reset as fol-

lows:

●If the displayed minutes before the reset are

in the range of :00 - :29, the hour displayed

before the reset will stay the same and the

minutes will be reset to :00.

●If the displayed minutes before the reset are

in the range of :30 - :59, the hour displayed

before the reset will advance by one hour

and the minutes will be reset to :00.

For example, if the MENU button and the

TUNE/SEEK button are pressed while the time

displayed is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display

will be reset to 8:00. If the buttons were pressed

while the time was between 8:30 and 8:59, the

display will be reset to 9:00. At the same time the

display will return to the audio.

FM/AM radio operation

FM·AM button:

Press the FM·AM button to change from AM ←→

FM reception.

The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during

FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast

signal is weak, the radio automatically changes

from stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE buttons:

Manual tuning

Press the TUNE or button for less

than 0.5 seconds for manual tuning.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

To move quickly through the channels, press and

hold either TUNE or button down

for more than 1.5 seconds.

SEEK buttons:

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK or button to seek

through the frequencies. Seek tuning begins

from low to high frequencies, or high to low

frequencies, depending on which button is

pressed, and stops at the next broadcasting sta-

tion. Once the highest broadcasting station is

reached, the radio continues in the seek mode at

the lowest broadcasting station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to

the A, B and C preset button in any combination

of AM or FM stations.

1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change

between storage banks. The radio displays

the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of

presets are active.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual

TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of

the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)

until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes

when the select button is pressed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,

and carefully insert the compact disc into the slot

with the label side up. The compact disc is auto-

matically pulled into the slot and starts to play.

If the radio is already operating, it automatically

turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with a compact

disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns

off and the last used compact disc starts to play.

TUNE (rewind and fast

forward) buttons:

When the TUNE or button is

pressed while the compact disc is playing, the

compact disc plays at an increased speed while

rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is

released, the compact disc returns to normal play

speed.

SEEK buttons:

When is pressed while the compact disc

is playing, the next track following the present

one starts to play from the beginning.

Press several times to skip several tracks.

Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-

vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-

pears in the display window. (When the last track

on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is

played.)

When is pressed, the track being played

returns to the beginning. Press several

times to skip back several tracks. Each time the

button is pressed, the CD moves back one track.

SEEK (Scan CDs) button:

Press and hold the SEEK button for more

than 1.5 seconds to scan through the first 10

seconds of a track on the compact disc. The

SCAN icon is flashed during scan mode.

The scan mode is canceled once it scans through

all the tracks on the disc, or if the SEEK

or button is pressed during the scan

mode.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while the com-

pact disc is being played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

1←→ Normal

1: The track that is currently playing will be re-

peated.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while the com-

pact disc is being played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

RDM ←→ Normal

RDM: Tracks from the disc that is currently play-

ing will be played randomly.

CD EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with a com-

pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

When the button is pressed while the

compact disc is being played, the compact disc

will eject and the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display when the

CD is loaded with the system on.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. RADIO AM·FM button*

2. PRESET A·B·C button

3. RPT button

4. speaker control button

5. RDM button

6. PAUSE·MUTE button

7. REAR CTRL button

8. SCAN button

9. TRACK button

10. SEEK/CAT button

11. TUNE/FLDR and AUDIO control knob

12. CD load button

13. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons

14. CD eject button

15. VOL/ON·OFF control knob

16. DISC·AUX button

LHA0944

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

*When the RADIO AM·FM button is

pressed, the satellite radio mode will be

skipped unless an optional satellite re-

ceiver and antenna are installed and an

XMTsatellite radio service subscription

is active. Satellite radio is not available

in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (if

so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-

tion precautions” earlier in this section.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an

optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-

stalled and an XMTsatellite radio service sub-

scription is active. Satellite radio is not available

in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation

VOL/ON·OFF control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then

push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob while the

system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD)

which was playing immediately before the system

was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF

control knob.

Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)

for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-

ing speed changes.

AUDIO knob (Bass, Treble, Fade and Bal-

ance):

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as

follows:

Bass →Treble →Fade →Balance

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press

the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears

in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust

Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also

use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balance

modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between

the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts

the sound between the right and left speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly

until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-

wise, the radio or CD display will automatically

reappear after about 10 seconds.

Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):

To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, press

the SETTING button. Then select the “Audio” key

using the NISSAN controller, then press the EN-

TER button; the audio settings screen will be

displayed. Select the “–” key or “+” key, then

press the ENTER button to change the SSV.

While in this screen you can also adjust the other

audio settings by selecting the corresponding

key.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, press the BACK button.

LHA0927

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

For information on how to use the NISSAN con-

troller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller”

earlier in this section.

Precision phased audio (if so equipped):

To turn on or off the precision phased audio,

press the SETTING button. Select the “Audio”

key using the NISSAN controller, then press the

ENTER button, the audio settings screen will be

displayed. Select the “Precision Phased Audio”

key, then press the ENTER button. If the amber

indicator light is displayed the precision phased

audio is enabled. Pressing the ENTER button

again will turn off the precision phased audio, the

indicator light will disappear.

When this item is turned on, super high pitch

sound and super low pitch sound are empha-

sized and midrange sound is played naturally.

While in this screen, you can also adjust the other

audio settings by selecting the corresponding

key.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, press the BACK button.

For information on how to use the NISSAN con-

troller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller”

earlier in this section.

Clock set

For setting the clock, see “Clock” earlier in this

section.

WHA0941 WHA0928

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD

certain text might be able to be displayed (when

CD encoded with text is being used).

Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is

encoded the following text might be able to be

displayed by selecting the “Text” key using the

NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but-

ton:

●Folder displays the name of the current

folder being accessed.

●File displays the name of the file currently

playing.

●Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the

song name.

●Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the

album name.

●Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the

artist’s name.

●Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur-

rently playing.

●Track displays the name of the song on the

CD currently playing.

Some of this text or modes might not display

while playing a regular CD. Press the BACK

button to exit the CD text display screen.

PAUSE·MUTE button:

To mute or pause the audio sound, press the

PAUSE·MUTE button.

Press the PAUSE·MUTE button again to resume

the audio sound.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the RADIO AM·FM button will change

the band as follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT* (satellite, if so equipped)

When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed while

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,

the radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on when

the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.

*When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed, the

satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an

optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-

stalled and an XMTsatellite radio service sub-

scription is active. Satellite radio is not available

in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO

AM·FM button is pressed, the compact disc will

automatically be turned off and the last radio

station played will come on.

WHA0946 WHA0947

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during

FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast

signal is weak, the radio will automatically change

from stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE/FLDR (Tuning) knob:

To manually tune the radio, turn the TUNE/FLDR

knob to the right or left.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

tuning buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button or the

TRACK button for less than 1.5 seconds

to tune from high to low or low to high frequen-

cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the

SCAN button again during this 5 second period

will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain

tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not

pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to

the next station.

PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-

tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT

(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C

preset button in any combination of FM, AM or

SAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using the

PRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station

band.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,

SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any

of the desired station memory buttons (1 –

6) until a beep sound is heard.

4. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data

information service transmitted by some radio

stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-

rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but

many stations are now considering broadcasting

RDS data.

RDS can display:

●Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

●Station name, such as “The Groove”.

●Music or programming type such as “Clas-

sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

●Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the

RDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position

and press the button, then press one of

the CD insert (1–6) slots. Insert the compact disc

into the slot with the label side facing up. The

compact disc will be guided automatically into

the slot and start playing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-

cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-

pact disc was playing, pressing the

VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact

disc.

button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, press

the button for less than 1.5 seconds. Se-

lect the loading slot by pressing the CD insert

select button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press and

hold the button for more than 1.5 seconds.

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the

display when CDs are loaded into the changer.

DISC·AUX button:

When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the

system off and the compact disc loaded, the

system will turn on and the compact disc will start

to play.

When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the

compact disc loaded with the radio playing, the

radio will automatically be turned off and the

compact disc will start to play.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:

When the SEEK/CAT button is pressed

while a compact disc is playing, the track being

played returns to its beginning. Press several

times to skip back through tracks. The compact

disc will go back the number of times the button

is pressed.

When the TRACK button is pressed while

the compact disc is playing, the next track will

start to play from its beginning. Press several

times to skip through tracks. The compact disc

will advance the number of times the button is

pressed. (When the last track on the compact

disc is skipped through, the first track will be

played.)

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-

lect tracks when a CD is being played.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK (Rewind·Fast For-

ward) buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind)

button or the TRACK (fast forward) button

while a compact disc is playing, the compact disc

will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When

the button is released, the compact disc will

return to normal play speed.

When the CD button is pressed with the system

off and the compact disc loaded, the system will

turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com-

pact disc loaded with the tape or the radio play-

ing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned

off and the compact disc will start to play.

TUNE FLDR (Folder) knob

While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn the

TUNE/FLDR knob right or left to scan forward or

backward through available folders.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press a

CD select button (1 – 6).

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while the com-

pact disc is played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

CD:

ALL DISC RPT →1 DISC RPT→1 TRK RPT →

ALL DISC RPT

MP3/WMA CD:

ALL DISC RPT →1 DISC RPT →1 FOLDER

RPT →1 TRK RPT →ALL DISC RPT

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.

1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will

be repeated.

1 TRK RPT: The track that is currently playing will

be repeated

1 FOLDER RPT: The folder that is currently being

accessed will be repeated.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while the com-

pact disc is played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

CD:

ALL DISC MIX →1 DISC MIX →ALL DISC MIX

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

MP3/WMA CD:

ALL DISC MIX →1 DISC MIX →1 FOLDER MIX

→ALL DISC MIX

ALL DISC MIX: All discs loaded will be played in

a mixed order.

1 DISC MIX: The tracks on the disc that is cur-

rently playing will be played in a mixed order.

1 FOLDER MIX: The tracks in the folder that is

currently being accessed will be played in a

mixed order.

SCAN button:

While listening to a CD, press the SCAN button

to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on

the CD playing. Pressing the SCAN button again

during this 10 second period stops the scan and

the CD remains on that track.

REAR CTRL:

Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rear

seat audio controller on. Rear Controls UN-

LOCKED will display. Pressing the REAR CTRL

button again to turn the rear seat audio controller

off. Rear Controls LOCKED will display. If the

vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audio

controller, the display will show “Rear Controls

Not Available”.

Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for ap-

proximately 1.5 seconds to turn on the rear dis-

play screen. Rear Display ON will display. Press

and hold the REAR CTRL button again will turn

the rear display screen off. Rear Display OFF will

display. If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear

display screen, the display will show “Rear Con-

trols Not Available”.

(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:

Press the button to turn the rear speakers

off and headphones on. Press this button again

to turn rear seat speakers back on and head-

phones off.

CD EJECT:

Current/Selected disc:

●Press the button, then press the slot

number (1 – 6) for the desired disc. The

compact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-

ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loaded

disc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected disc

is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc

will reload.

All discs:

●Press and hold the button for more

than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be

ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed

within 15 seconds, or the button is

pressed again during the eject sequence,

the entire disc eject sequence will be can-

celed.

When this button is pressed while the compact

disc is being played, the compact disc will eject

and the last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs

have been loaded into the changer in CD mode

only.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

AUX jack (if so equipped)

The AUX jack s

1is located below the air condi-

tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack accepts

any standard analog audio input, such as from a

portable cassette tape player, MP3 player or

laptop computers.

Press the DISC·AUX button to play a compatible

device when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

LHA1017

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. PRESET A·B·C button

2. DISC/AUX button

3. speaker control button

4. REAR CTRL button

5. SCAN·RPT button

6. TRACK button

7. SEEK/CAT button

8. TUNE/FLDR and AUDIO control knob

9. CompactFlash insert slot

10. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

11. CD eject button

12. VOL/ON·OFF control knob

13. AM·FM/SAT button*

14. MUSIC BOX button

WHA0945

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

*When the AM·FM/SAT button is

pressed, the satellite radio mode will be

skipped unless an optional satellite re-

ceiver and antenna are installed and an

XMTsatellite radio service subscription

is active. Satellite radio is not available

in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so

equipped)

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-

tion precautions” earlier in this section.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an

optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-

stalled and an XMTsatellite radio service sub-

scription is active. Satellite radio is not available

in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation

VOL/ON·OFF control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then

push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob while the

system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD)

which was playing immediately before the system

was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF

control knob.

Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)

for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-

ing speed changes.

AUDIO knob (Bass, Treble, Fade and Bal-

ance):

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as

follows:

Bass →Treble →Fade →Balance

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press

the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears

in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust

Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also

use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balance

modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between

the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts

the sound between the right and left speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly

until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-

wise, the radio or CD display will automatically

reappear after about 10 seconds.

Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):

To change the SSV mode from OFF (0) to 5,

press the SETTING button. Then touch the “Au-

dio” key, the audio settings screen will be dis-

played. Touch the “–” key or “+” key, to change

the SSV.

While in this screen you can also adjust the other

audio settings by touching the corresponding

key.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, touch the “BACK” key.

LHA0884

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Precision phased audio (if so equipped):

To turn on or off the precision phased audio,

press the SETTING button. Then touch the “Au-

dio” key; the audio settings screen will be dis-

played. Touch the “Precision Phased Audio ON”

key. If the amber indicator light is displayed, the

precision phased audio is enabled. Touching the

“Precision Phased Audio ON” key again will turn

off the precision phased audio; the indicator light

will disappear.

When this item is turned on, super high pitch

sound and super low pitch sound are empha-

sized and midrange sound is played naturally.

While in this screen, you can also adjust the other

audio settings by touching the corresponding

key.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, touch the “BACK” key.

Clock set

For setting the clock, see “Clock” earlier in this

section.

LHA0900 WHA0942

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD

certain text might be able to be displayed (when

CD encoded with text is being used).

Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is

encoded the following text might be able to be

displayed by touching the “Text” key:

●Folder displays the name of the current

folder being accessed.

●File displays the name of the file currently

playing.

●Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the

song name.

●Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the

album name.

●Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the

artist’s name.

●Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur-

rently playing.

●Track displays the name of the song on the

CD currently playing.

Some of this text or modes might not display

while playing a regular CD. Press the BACK

button to exit the CD text display screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the RADIO AM·FM button will change

the band as follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT* (satellite, if so equipped)

When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed while

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,

the radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on when

the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.

*When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed, the

satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an

optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-

stalled and an XMTsatellite radio service sub-

scription is active. Satellite radio is not available

in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO

AM·FM button is pressed, the compact disc will

automatically be turned off and the last radio

station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during

FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast

signal is weak, the radio will automatically change

from stereo to monaural reception.

WHA0949 WHA0950

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

TUNE/FLDR (Tuning) knob:

To manually tune the radio, turn the TUNE/FLDR

knob to the right or left.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

tuning buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button or the

TRACK button for less than 1.5 seconds

to tune from high to low or low to high frequen-

cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN·RPT (SCAN tuning) button:

Press the SCAN·RPT button to initiate scan tun-

ing. Scan tuning will stop at each broadcasting

station for 5 seconds. Press the SCAN·RPT but-

ton again during this 5 second period to stop

scan tuning; the radio will remain tuned to that

station. If the SCAN·RPT button is not pressed

within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the next

station.

PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-

tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT

(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C

preset button in any combination of FM, AM or

SAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using the

PRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station

band.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,

SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any

of the desired station memory buttons (1 –

6) until a beep sound is heard.

4. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data

information service transmitted by some radio

stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-

rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but

many stations are now considering broadcasting

RDS data.

RDS can display:

●Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

●Station name, such as “The Groove”.

●Music or programming type such as “Clas-

sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

●Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the

RDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position

and insert the compact disc into the slot with the

label side facing up. The compact disc will be

guided automatically into the slot and start play-

ing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-

cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-

pact disc was playing, pressing the

VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact

disc.

DISC/AUX button:

When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the

system off and the compact disc loaded, the

system will turn on and the compact disc will start

to play.

When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the

compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the

radio will automatically be turned off and the

compact disc will start to play.

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:

When the SEEK/CAT button is pressed

while a compact disc is playing, the track being

played returns to its beginning. Press several

times to skip back through tracks. The compact

disc will go back the number of times the button

is pressed.

When the TRACK button is pressed while

the compact disc is playing, the next track will

start to play from its beginning. Press several

times to skip through tracks. The compact disc

will advance the number of times the button is

pressed. (When the last track on the compact

disc is skipped through, the first track will be

played.)

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-

lect tracks when a CD is being played.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK (Rewind·Fast For-

ward) buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind)

button or the TRACK (fast forward) button

while a compact disc is playing; the compact disc

will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When

the button is released, the compact disc will

return to normal play speed.

When the CD button is pressed with the system

off and the compact disc loaded the system will

turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com-

pact disc loaded with the tape or the radio play-

ing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned

off and the compact disc will start to play.

TUNE FLDR (Folder) knob

While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn the

TUNE/FLDR knob right or left to scan forward or

backward through available folders.

SCAN·RPT (random and repeat) button:

When the SCAN·RPT button is pressed while the

compact disc is being played, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 DISC RPT →1 TRK RPT →1 DISC RDM →1

DISC RPT

MP3/WMA CD:

1 DISC RPT →1 FOLDER RPT →1 TRK RPT →

1 DISC RDM →1 FOLDER RDM →1 DISC RPT

1 DISC RPT: the entire disc will be repeated.

1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will be

repeated.

1 DISC RDM: all tracks will be played randomly.

1 FOLDER RPT: the folder currently being ac-

cessed will be repeated.

1 FOLDER RDM: the tracks in the current folder

being accessed will be played randomly.

REAR CTRL:

Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rear

seat audio controller on. Rear Controls UN-

LOCKED will display. Pressing the REAR CTRL

button again will turn the rear seat audio control-

ler off. Rear Controls LOCKED will display. If the

vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audio

controller, the display will show “Rear Controls

Not Available”.

Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for ap-

proximately 1.5 seconds to turn on the rear dis-

play screen on. Rear Display ON will display.

Press and hold the REAR CTRL button again will

turn the rear display screen off. Rear Display OFF

will display. If the vehicle is not equipped with a

rear display screen, the display will show “Rear

Controls Not Available”.

(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:

Press the button to turn the rear speakers

off and headphones on. Press this button again

to turn rear seat speakers back on and head-

phones off.

CD EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with the com-

pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

When button is pressed while the com-

pact disc is being played, the compact disc will

eject and the system will turn off.

AUX jack (if so equipped)

The AUX jack s

1is located below the air condi-

tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack accepts

any standard analog audio input, such as from a

portable cassette tape player, MP3 player or

laptop computers.

Press the DISC/AUX button to play a compatible

device when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

COMPACTFLASH™ (CF) PLAYER

OPERATION (if so equipped)

Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON posi-

tion, and insert a CF card s

1into the Compact-

Flash™ player slot s

2. Then press the DISC/AUX

button repeatedly to switch to the Compact-

Flash™ mode.

If the system has been turned off while the Com-

pactFlash™ card was playing, pressing the

VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the Com-

pactFlash™ card.

LHA1017 LHA1018

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

DISC/AUX button:

When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the

system off and the CF card inserted, the system

will turn on. If another audio source is playing and

a CF card is inserted, press the DISC/AUX but-

ton repeatedly until the center display changes to

the CompactFlash™ mode.

CF display mode

While listening to CF certain text might be able to

be displayed.

Depending on how the files are encoded on the

CF the following text might be able to be dis-

played by touching the “Text” key:

●Folder displays the name of the current

folder being accessed.

●File displays the name of the file currently

playing.

●Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the

song name.

●Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the

album name.

●Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the

artist’s name.

Press the BACK button to exit the CF text display

screen.

WHA0953 WHA0954

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button or the

TRACK button while the CF card is being played,

the next track or the beginning of the current track

on the CF will be played.

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind)

button or the TRACK (fast forward) button

for more than approximately 1.5 seconds, the CF

card will play while rewinding or fast forwarding.

When the SEEK/CAT (rewind) button or

the TRACK (fast forward) button is re-

leased, the CF card will return to the normal

playing speed.

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-

lect tracks when the CF card is being played.

For more information on how to use the NISSAN

controller, see “How to use the NISSAN control-

ler” earlier in this section.

Folder selection:

To change to another folder in the CF card either:

●Turn the TUNE/FLDR knob right or left.

●Touch the desired folder key on screen.

●Use the NISSAN controller.

SCAN·RPT button:

Pressing the SCAN·RPT button while the CF

card is playing, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

1 CF CARD RPT →1 FOLDER RPT →1 TRK

RPT →1 CF CARD RDM →1 FOLDER RDM →

1 CF CARD RPT

1 CF CARD RPT: the entire CF card will be

repeated.

1 FOLDER RPT: the folder currently being ac-

cessed will be repeated.

1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will be

repeated.

1 CF CARD RDM: all the tracks on the CF card

will be played randomly.

1 FOLDER RDM: the tracks in the current folder

being accessed will be played randomly.

CF eject:

Press the knob next to the CF slot while a CF

card is inserted, the CF card will be ejected.

Troubleshooting messages:

The following messages will be displayed under

certain conditions:

●Reading CompactFlash™

The system is reading the CF card inserted

in the slot.

●No CompactFlash™ card

A CF card is not inserted in the slot.

●CompactFlash™ read error

The system cannot read the CF card.

●Unplayable file

The system cannot play a music file.

●No audio file

The CF card inserted in the slot or its folder

does not contain any music files.

Compatibility with other media:

If a commercially available CompactFlash™

adapter is inserted into the slot, other memory

media can also be used.

MUSIC BOX HARD-DISK DRIVE

AUDIO SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The Music Box hard-disk drive audio system can

store songs from CDs being played. The system

has a 9.3 gigabyte (GB) storage capacity and

can record up to 200 hours (approximately 2,900

songs).

The following CDs can be recorded in the Music

Box hard-disk drive audio system:

●CDs without MP3/WMA files.

●Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid

CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) speci-

fication in CD-Extras.

●First session of multisession disc.

Extreme temperature conditions [below 24°F

(220°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affect

the performance of the hard disk.

NOTE:

If the hard disk needs to be replaced due to

a malfunction, all stored music data will be

erased.

Recording songs

1. Operate the audio system to play a CD.

For information on playing CDs, see “Com-

pact Disc (CD) player operation” earlier in

this section.

2. Touch the “REC” key.

The system starts recording the track being

played and REC CD appears on the screen.

If the title information of the track being recorded

is stored either in the hard-disk drive or in the CD,

the title is automatically displayed on the screen.

For title acquisition from the hard-disk drive, mu-

sic recognition technology and related data are

provided by GracenoteT.

To view the details of the track, touch the “Text”

key on the screen or use the NISSAN controller

and press the ENTER button. The track name and

album title are displayed on the screen.

If a track is not recorded successfully due to

skipping sounds, the symbol is displayed

behind the track number.

The Music Box audio system cannot perform

recording under the following conditions:

●There is not enough space in the hard disk.

WHA0955 WHA0956

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●The number of albums reaches the maximum

of 500.

●The number of tracks reaches the maximum

of 3,000.

Automatic recording:

If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned to

ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted. For

more information, see “Music Box settings” later

in this section.

Stopping recording:

To stop the recording, touch the “STOP” key on

the screen. If the CD is ejected, the audio system

is turned off or the ignition switch is turned to the

OFF position, the recording also stops. Playing recorded songs

Select the Music Box audio system by using one

of the following methods:

●Press the mode select switch on the steer-

ing wheel.

For information, see “Steering wheel switch

for audio control” later in this section.

●Press the MUSIC BOX button.

●Give voice commands.

For information, see “NISSAN voice recog-

nition system” later in this section.

Stopping playback:

The system stops playing when:

●Another mode (radio, CD, CompactFlash™

or AUX) is selected.

●The audio system is turned off.

●The ignition switch is turned to the OFF

position.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button or the

TRACK button while a track is being played; the

next track or the beginning of the current track will

be played.

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind)

button or the TRACK (fast forward) button

for more than approximately 1.5 seconds; the

track will play while rewinding or fast forwarding.

When the SEEK/CAT (rewind) button or

the TRACK (fast forward) button is re-

leased, the track will return to the normal playing

speed.

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-

lect tracks.

For more information on how to use the NISSAN

controller, see “How to use the NISSAN control-

ler” earlier in this section.

WHA0957

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

SCAN·RPT button:

Pressing the SCAN·RPT button while a track is

playing, the play pattern can be changed as fol-

lows:

ALL Playlist RPT →1 Playlist RPT →1 TRK RPT

→ALL Playlist RDM →1 Playlist RDM →ALL

Playlist RPT

ALL Playlist RPT: the entire playlist will be re-

peated.

1 Playlist RPT: the playlist currently being played

will be repeated.

1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will be

repeated.

ALL Playlist RDM: all the tracks in the playlist will

be played randomly.

1 Playlist RDM: the tracks in the current playlist

will be played randomly.

Music Box menu

There are some options available during play-

back. Touch the “Menu” key, then select one of

the following that are displayed on the screen, if

necessary. Refer to the following information for

each item:

●Play by Artist

Plays songs by an artist whose music is

currently being played. The artists are sorted

in alphabetical order.

●Play by Album

Plays tracks in each album. The albums are

sorted in alphabetical order.

●Play by Date

Plays tracks in each album. The albums are

sorted in order of the date when they were

stored in the system.

●Play by Mood

Plays music from one of the following

moods:

– Relaxing Music

– Lively Music

– Slow Music

– Upbeat Music

LHA0958 LHA0959

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Play by Category

Plays music from one of the following cat-

egories:

– My Favorites

– Hit Songs

– Kids’ Songs

– Rarely Played

●Search Artists

Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order.

Selecting an artist displays all of the tracks

by the artist and starts playing the first track.

●Search Albums

Displays a list of albums in order of the date

when they were stored in the system. Se-

lecting an album displays all of the tracks on

the album and starts playing the first track.

Touch the “Sort” key to re-sort albums in one

of the following order:

– Rec. (Recorded) Date

– Name

– Release Year

– Artist

●Search Song Details

Set the conditions and touch the “Start

Song Search” key to search for a desired

song that is stored in the system. The con-

ditions are as follows:

– Music Tempo (All, Slow, Normal and Fast)

– Decade (All, ’70s, ’80s, ’90s, ’00s, ’10s

and After)

– Group (All, Male Artist, Female Artist,

Group and Duo)

– Category (Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B,

Hip Hop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae,

Folk, Blues, Country, Metal, Easy Listen-

ing, New Age, Soundtrack, Gospel & Re-

ligious, World, Classical, Children’s and

Other)

●Search Keywords

Input a search keyword using the keypad

displayed on the screen.

For information, see “How to use the touch

screen” earlier in this section.

●Edit Albums

Select a category (Rec. (Recorded) Date,

Name, Released Year and Artist) and edit

the details using the keypad displayed on

the screen.

For information, see “How to use the touch

screen” earlier in this section.

LHA0960

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Music Box System Info.

Displays the following information about the

Music Box audio system:

– Music Box Used / Free Space

Information about Saved Album, Saved

Track and Remaining Time is displayed.

– Mood Categories

Number of saved tracks and their catego-

ries Relaxing Music, Lively Music, Slow

Music, Upbeat Music and Others are dis-

played.

– Deleted Items

Information about the deleted tracks is

displayed.

– Search Missing Titles

If titles are not displayed for CDs that

have been recorded, titles can be ac-

quired using one of the following meth-

ods:

●Retrieve from HDD

Searches the title using the database in

the hard-disk.

●Retrieve from CF

Searches the title from the information

acquired on the Internet.

●Transfer Missing Titles to CF

Transfers the information of the album

recorded without titles to a Compact-

Flash™ card.

– Music Box Settings

For information, see “Music Box settings”

later in this section.

– CDDB Version

The version of the built-in GracenoteT

Database is displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Music Box text display:

While listening to a track in the Music Box audio

system you can view certain text. Touch the “Text”

key to display the following information for each

item:

●Set Mood

Set the mood category of the track to “Re-

laxing Music”, “Lively Music”, “Slow Music”

or “Upbeat Music”.

●Delete Track

Delete the track being played.

●Edit Info.

Edit the name of the track being played and

its artist using the keypad displayed on the

screen.

For information, see “How to use the touch

screen” earlier in this section.

The category of the track can also be set to

Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip Hop,

Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk, Blues,

Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New Age,

Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious, World,

Classical, Children’s and Others.

●Remove Track

Reset the mood setting of a track.

Restoring deleted data

Deleted music data can be restored by perform-

ing the following:

1. Touch the “Menu”key and then the touch the

“Music Box System Info.” key on the screen.

2. Touch the “Deleted Items” key and then the

“Album/Track” key.

3. Touch the “Restore Album/Track” key to re-

store the deleted music data.

LHA0961 LHA0962

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

You can also listen to the beginning of each track

that has been deleted by performing the follow-

ing:

1. Touch the “Menu” key and then the “Music

Box System Info.” key on the screen.

2. Touch the “Deleted Items” key and then the

“Play Sample” key.

Music Box settings

To set up the Music Box hard-disk drive audio

system to your preferred settings, touch the

“Menu” key during playback, then touch the “Mu-

sic Box System Info.” key, and then the “Music

Box Settings” key.

●Automatic Recording:

When this item is turned to ON, the Music

Box hard-disk audio system automatically

starts recording when a CD is inserted.

●Recording Quality:

Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132

kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.

LHA0964 LHA0965 LHA0962

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Title Text Priority:

Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc

Data Base) to acquire track information from

the GracenoteTDatabase or set to CD

TEXT to acquire the information from CDs.

●Delete ALL Music Box Data:

Delete all music data stored on the hard disk.

GracenoteT

NOTE:

●The information contained in the

GracenoteTDatabase is not fully guaran-

teed.

●The service of the GracenoteTDatabase on

the Internet may be stopped without prior

notice for maintenance.

End-User License Agreement

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-

TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.

GracenoteTMusicID™ Terms of Use

This device contains software from Gracenote,

Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The

software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft-

ware”) enables this application to do online disc

identification and obtain music-related informa-

tion, including name, artist, track, and title infor-

mation (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers

(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other func-

tions. You may use Gracenote Data only by

means of the intended End-User functions of this

device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for

your own personal non-commercial use only. You

agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the

Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to

any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR

EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE

SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT-

TED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use

the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,

and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio-

late these restrictions. If your license terminates,

you agree to cease any and all use of the

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights

in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership

rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote

become liable for any payment to you for any

information that you provide. You agree that

Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this

Agreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique

identifier to track queries for statistical purposes.

The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric

identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID ser-

vice to count queries without knowing anything

about who you are. For more information, see the

web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for

the Gracenote MusicID Service.

LHA0963

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The Gracenote Software and each item of

Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”

Gracenote makes no representations or warran-

ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy

of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote

Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete

data from the Gracenote Servers or to change

data categories for any cause that Gracenote

deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the

Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are

error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-

ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with

new enhanced or additional data types or cat-

egories that Gracenote may provide in the future

and is free to discontinue its online services at

any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-

CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT.

GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE-

SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR

USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR

ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE

WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM-

AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST

REVENUES.

Music recognition technology and related data

are provided by GracenoteT. Gracenote is the

industry standard in music recognition technol-

ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-

mation visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,

This product and service may practice one or

more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;

#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,

#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,

#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend-

ing. Some services supplied under license from

Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks

of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,

and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-

marks of Gracenote.

CD/CF (CompactFlash™) CARE AND

CLEANING

CD:

●Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

●Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

●To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

LHA0049

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

●A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the

side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

CF cards:

CAUTION

Do not force the CompactFlash™ card into

the CompactFlash™ player slot. Forcing

the CF card could damage the pins inside

the CF player slot, especially if the CF card

is upside down or backwards.

●Never touch the terminal portion of the Com-

pactFlash™ cards. Do not bend the cards.

●Always place the cards in the storage case

when they are not being used.

●Do not place heavy objects on the cards.

●Do not store the cards in highly humid loca-

tions.

●Do not expose the cards to direct sunlight.

●Do not spill any liquids on the cards.

Refer to the CompactFlash™ card Owner’s

Manual for more details.

LHA1002

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. Volume control switch

2. MODE select switch

3. POWER on/off switch

4. Tuning switch

1. Volume control switch

2. Phone operation switch

3. POWER on and MODE select switch

4. Tuning switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using the

controls on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON

position, push the POWER switch to turn the

audio system on or off.

If you have the Type B switch, with the ignition key

turned to the ACC or ON position push the

MODE switch to turn the audio system on.

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the mode

in the following sequence: PRESET A →PRE-

SET B →PRESET C →Music Box** (if so

equipped) →CD* →CompactFlash™* (if so

equipped) →DVD* (if so equipped) →AUX***.

*These modes are only available when compat-

ible media storage is inserted into the device.

**This mode is only available when music has

been downloaded into the Music Box hard-disk

drive audio system.

***This mode is only available when a compatible

auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down to

increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,

B or C), push the tuning switch or

for less than 1.5 seconds to change to the next

preset station in memory.

Type A

WHA0611

Type B

WHA0612

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch or for more

than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous

radio station.

Next/Previous track (CD/CF):

Push the tuning switch or for less

than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the

present track or skip to the next track. Push

several times to skip back or skip through tracks.

This system searches for the blank intervals be-

tween selections. If there is a blank interval within

1 program or there is no interval between pro-

grams, the system may not stop in the desired or

expected location.

Next/Previous track (Music Box):

Push the tuning switch or for less

than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the

present track or skip to the next track. Push

several times to skip back or skip through tracks.

Push and hold the tuning switch or

for more than 1.5 seconds to change playlists.

When the last playlist is playing, the next playlist

will be selected.

Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the tuning switch or for more

than 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc up

or down.

1. Infrared transmitter lens*

2. Rear display screen

*Red transmitters will be visible when infra-

red headphones are on.

REMOTE AUDIO SYSTEM

CONTROLS (if so equipped)

Press the REAR CTRL button on the front radio

control panel to allow the remote controller to

control some audio system functions. Press the

REAR CTRL button again to allow the audio

system to be controlled by only the front controls.

Press the button on the front radio control

panel; the headphones symbol and the message

LHA1062

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

“Headphones ON” illuminates on the front dis-

play when the headphones are on.

One or two infrared headphones and one remote

controller are included if the vehicle is equipped

with the DVD entertainment system.

For vehicles equipped with the FM/AM/SAT radio

with compact disc player, if the rear headphones

are turned on, the rear speakers will be disabled.

The rear passengers can use the wireless head-

phones to listen to a different media than the front

passengers. The rear passengers can listen to

the same media along with the front passengers

or they can listen to a different media.

For more information on the remote controller,

see “NISSAN Mobile Entertainment System

(MES)” later in this section.

VOL (volume) wireless headphones

dial:

The VOL dial on the wireless headphones allows

the rear passengers to adjust the headphone

volume level.

Speaker control (front panel)

button:

Press the button on the front radio control

panel to turn the rear speakers off and the wire-

less headphones on. Press the button

again to turn rear speakers back on and wireless

headphones off.

MODE (remote control) button:

The MODE button on the remote controller al-

lows the rear passengers to change between

Preset A, Preset B, Preset C, Music Box**, CD*,

CompactFlash*, DVD* and AUX. When a source

of media is selected, the media type will be dis-

played on the rear screen.

*These modes are only available when compat-

ible media storage is inserted into the device.

**This mode is only available when music has

been downloaded into the Music Box hard-disk

drive audio system.

Seek (remote control)

buttons:

In AM or FM mode, the or the seek

buttons on the remote controller allow the rear

seat passengers to find the next or previous

preset radio station.

In CD, Music Box hard-disk drive audio system

and CompactFlash™ mode, the or

the seek buttons allow the rear passen-

gers to find the next or previous selection.

REW and FF (remote

control) buttons:

When the (rewind) or the (fast for-

ward) button on the remote controller is pressed

while in AM or FM mode, the radio will tune to the

next frequency.

When the (rewind) or the (fast for-

ward) button on the remote controller is pressed

while in CD, Music Box hard-disk audio system,

or CompactFlash™, the media will play while re-

winding or fast forwarding.

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear

passenger and driver side windows.

CAUTION

●Do not place metalized film near the

rear driver or passenger side window

glass or attach any metal parts to it. This

may cause poor reception or noise.

●When cleaning the inside of the rear

driver or passenger side window, be

careful not to scratch or damage the

window antenna. Lightly wipe along the

antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

This vehicle is equipped with the mobile enter-

tainment system, which enables you to play a

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD), providing the im-

ages and sounds both in the front and rear dis-

play screens.

WARNING

●The driver must not attempt to operate

or view the Mobile Entertainment Sys-

tem while the vehicle is in motion so

that full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

●Do not attempt to modify the system to

display a movie on the front screen

while the vehicle is being driven. Doing

so may distract the driver and may

cause a collision and serious personal

injury or death.

CAUTION

●The glass screen on the liquid crystal

display may break if hit with a hard or

sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not

touch the liquid crystalline material,

which contains a small amount of mer-

cury. In case of contact with skin, wash

immediately with soap and water.

●Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaning

the Mobile Entertainment System com-

ponents. Do not use solvents or clean-

ing solutions.

Do not attempt to use the system in extreme

temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or

above 158°F (70°C)].

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, do not

operate the system more than 15 minutes without

starting the engine.

Movies will not be shown on the front display

while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce

driver distraction. Audio is available when a movie

is played. To view movies in the front display, stop

the vehicle in a safe location, move the shift

selector lever to the P (Park) position and apply

the parking brake.

LHA1019

NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT

SYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. EJECT button

2. DVD slot

3. Auxiliary input jack

DIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYER

CONTROLS

1. EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with the

DVD loaded, it will be ejected.

The display will show the eject symbol in the

upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds

once the button is pressed.

If the DVD is not loaded, the display will

show “NO DISC”.

If the DVD comes out and is not removed

within 25 seconds, it will be pulled back into

the slot to protect it.

2. DVD slot:

Insert a DVD into the slot with the label side

facing up. The DVD will be guided automati-

cally into the slot.

3. Auxiliary input jack:

For information, see “DVD auxiliary input

jacks” later in this section.

WHA0967

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. POWER button

2. STOP button

3. NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and PREVI-

OUS TRACK/CHAPTER button

4. TITLE button

5. ENTER button

6. DISPLAY button

7. MODE button

8. SUBTITLE button

9. AUDIO button

10. ANGLE button

11. CLEAR button

12. PAUSE button

13. PLAY button

14. FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE

button

15. MENU button

16. NAVIGATION keys

17. BACK button

18. NUMERIC KEYPAD

REMOTE CONTROL

Refer to “Remote control operation” later in this

section for the function of each button.

FLIP-DOWN SCREEN

The flip-down screen has a wireless remote con-

trol receiver s

1located at the bottom of the

screen.

CAUTION

●The glass screen on the liquid crystal

display may break if hit with a hard or

sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not

touch the liquid crystalline material,

which contains a small amount of mer-

cury. In case of contact with skin, wash

immediately with soap and water.

LHA0317

LHA0315

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●The screen rotates down to view and up

into the housing to store when not in

use. Ensure that the screen is latched

securely into the housing when stored.

Headphones

Power ON/OFF:

Press the power button to turn the headphones

on or off.

Volume control:

Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol-

ume.

The headphones will automatically be turned off

in 30 seconds if there is no sound during that

period. To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, keep the power supply turned off when

not in use.

NOTE:

For optimum infrared headphone perfor-

mance, increase the volume on the rear

seat controller to the maximum level and

adjust the infrared headphone volume us-

ing the volume control on the headphones.

Using a lower volume setting on the rear

seat controller can cause static noise in the

infrared headphones.

SAA0720 SAA0721

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

BEFORE OPERATING THE DVD

MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

Precautions

Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-

ment system.

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operate the

DVD System or wear the headphones

while the vehicle is in motion so that full

attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

CAUTION

●Only operate the DVD while the vehicle

engine is running. Operating the DVD

for extended periods of time with the

engine OFF can discharge the vehicle

battery.

●Do not allow the system to get wet.

Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-

uids may cause the system to

malfunction.

While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVD player

does not guarantee complete functionality of all

VIDEO-CD formats.

●The technology protected by the U.S. patent

and other intellectual property rights owned

by Macrovision Corporation and other right

holders is adopted for this system.

●This copyright protected technology cannot

be used without a permit from Macrovision

Corporation. It is limited to be personal use,

etc., as long as the permit from Macrovision

Corporation is not issued.

●Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.

●Dolby digital is manufactured under license

from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

●Dolby and the double D mark are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

●DTS and DTS Digital Surround are regis-

tered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,

Inc.

Parental level (parental control)

DVDs with the parental control setting can be

played with this system. Please use your own

judgement to set the parental control with the

system.

Disc selection

You can play the following disc formats with the

DVD drive:

●DVD-VIDEO

●VIDEO-CD

●CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) (CD

with MP3/WMA cannot be played.)

Use DVDs with a region code 1, ALL or 1 in-

cluded for your DVD entertainment system. The

region code is displayed as a small symbol

printed on the top of the DVD. This vehicle-

installed DVD player cannot play DVDs with a

region code other than 1 or ALL.

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Display settings

Front display:

To adjust the front display mode, press the SET-

TING button while the DVD is being played,

select the “Display”key with the NISSAN control-

ler, and then press the ENTER button. To adjust

the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint, color, con-

trast and black level select each key using the

NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.

Then you can adjust each item using the NISSAN

controller. After changes have been made press

the BACK button to save the settings.

Rear display:

To adjust the rear display mode, press the DISP

(Display) button on the remote controller.

To adjust the display brightness, tint, color and

contrast, select each key using the joystick on the

remote controller and tilt the joystick to right or

left.

Press the BACK button to apply the settings and

return to the previous display

PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILE

DISC (DVD)

With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos,

video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passen-

gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde-

pendently of the front seat.

Press the DISC/AUX button located on the front

controls to hear the sound of the DVD play

through the speakers.

Press the REAR CTRL button located on the

front controls to disable or enable rear seat audio

controls. For more information on rear seat audio

controls see, “Rear Audio Controls” earlier in this

section.

WHA0968 LHA0972

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Pressing the button on the front controls

turns the rear speakers on or off and enables or

disables the wireless headphones .

It is possible to operate the DVD player by remote

control.

Headphones are a wireless type and no cables

are necessary. You can use them in almost all the

ranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to use

the headphones in the front seat.)

DISC/AUX button

Park the vehicle in a safe location and

apply the parking brake for the front seat

occupants to operate the DVD drive while

watching the images.

Press the DISC/AUX button on the instrument

panel and turn the display to the DVD mode.

When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed auto-

matically.

The operation screen will be turned on when the

DISC/AUX button located on the instrument

panel is pressed while a DVD is being played,

and it will turn off automatically after a period of

time. To turn it on again, press the DISC/AUX

button once more.

DVD operation keys

To operate the DVD drive, touch the preferred key

(if so equipped) or select the preferred key dis-

played on the operation screen using the

NISSAN controller.

NOTE:

If the display in your vehicle is not touch

screen enabled; use the NISSAN controller

and the ENTER button to operate the fol-

lowing functions. For more information on

how to operate the NISSAN controller, see

“How to use the NISSAN controller” earlier

in this section.

PAUSE key:

Touch the “ ” PAUSE key to pause the DVD.

To resume playing the DVD, touch the

“”PLAY key.

To pause the DVD, it is also possible to press

the button on the keypad of the remote

controller.

PLAY key:

Touch the “ ” PLAY key to start playing the

DVD, for example, after pausing the DVD

To start playing the DVD, it is also possible to

press the button on the keypad of the

remote controller.

STOP key:

Touch the “ ” STOP key to stop playing the

DVD.

To stop playing the DVD, it is also possible to

press the button on the keypad of the

remote controller.

SKIP (forward) key:

Touch the “ ” SKIP key to skip the chapter(

s) of the disc forward. The chapters will advance

the number of times the “ ” SKIP key is

touched.

Touch and hold the “ ” SKIP key for more

than 1.5 seconds to fast forward the disc. When

the “ ” SKIP key is released the disc will be

played normally.

To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is also possible

to press the button on the keypad of the

remote controller.

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

SKIP (rewind) key:

Touch the “ ”SKIP key to skip the chapter(s)

of the disc backward. The chapters will go back

the number of times the “ ” SKIP key is

touched.

Touch and hold the “ ” SKIP key for more

than 1.5 seconds to rewind the disc. When the

“” SKIP key is released the disc will be

played normally.

To skip the chapter(s) backward, it is also pos-

sible to press the button on the keypad of

the remote controller.

DVD settings

Touch the “Settings” key to adjust the following

settings while playing a DVD.

When all the changes have been made, press

BACK button to save all the settings.

LHA0969 LHA0970

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Switch to DVD-AUX:

Switch the output source from the DVD drive to

another device connected to the auxiliary input

jacks located on the DVD player.

For more information, see “DVD auxiliary input

jacks” later in this section.

Menu:

Some menus specific to each DVD will be

shown. For details, see the instructions attached

to the DVD.

Top Menu:

Each title menu in the disc will be shown. For

details, see the instructions attached to the DVD.

Audio:

Some audio tracks specific to each DVD will be

shown. For details, see the instructions attached

to the DVD.

Subtitle:

Choose the preferred DVD subtitle language by

touching the “ ” key or the “ ” key.

Display Mode:

Choose from the Full, Wide, Normal or the Cin-

ema mode by touching the “ ” key or the

“” key.

Angle:

If the DVD contains different angles (such as

moving images), the current image angle can be

switched to another one.

Choose a different angle by touching the “–” key

or the “+” key; the angle will change if available.

Angle Mark:

When this item is turned on, an angle mark will be

shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene

can be seen from a different angle. Touch the

“ON” key to enable the angle mark; the indicator

light will illuminate.

10Key Search:

Touch the “10Key Search” key to open the num-

ber entry screen. Input the number you want to

search for and touch the “OK” key. The specified

Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be played.

Title Search:

The scene with the specified title will be dis-

played the number of times the “–” key or the “+”

key is touched.

Menu Skip:

DVD menus are automatically configured and the

contents will be played directly when the “Menu

LHA0971

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Skip” key is turned on. Note that some discs may

not be played directly even if this item is turned

on.

DVD Language:

Touch the “DVD Language” key to open the num-

ber entry screen. Input the number correspond-

ing to the preferred language and touch the “OK”

key. The DVD top menu language will be

changed to the one specified.

DRC:

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows you

to tune the dynamic range of the sound recorded

in the DolbyTDigital format. Touch the “–” key or

the “+” key to tune the DRC.

Auxiliary input jacks

The auxiliary input jacks are located on the front of

the DVD player which is located inside the center

console. NTSC and PAL compatible devices

such as video games, camcorders and portable

video players can be connected to the auxiliary

jacks.

The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-

tion purposes.

●Yellow - video input

●White - left channel audio input

●Red - right channel audio input

Before connecting a device to a jack, power off

the portable device and turn off the DVD player.

To view something connected to the auxiliary

input jacks, press the DISC/AUX button until the

DVD mode appears, then touch the “Settings”

key. Then touch the “Switch to DVD-AUX” key.

The screen will change to the DVD-AUX mode.

DVD-AUX settings

Touch the “Settings” key to adjust the following

settings:

●Switch to DVD:

Touch this key to switch back to the DVD mode.

●Video Format:

If the auxiliary source is in a different video

format, touch the “ ” key or the “ ”

key, the video format will change.

●Display Mode:

Choose from the Full, Wide, Normal or Cin-

ema mode by touching the “ ” key or

the “ ” key.

LHA0973

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

When all the changes have been made, press the

BACK button to save all the settings.

REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION

For all operation precautions, see “Before oper-

ating the DVD Mobile Entertainment System”

earlier in this section.

The DVD system can also be controlled by using

the remote controller in the rear seats. See the

following items.

PWR on/off button:

With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or ON

position, press the PWR button to turn the DVD

rear display on or off.

NOTE:

The PWR button on the remote control only

turns the rear display on or off.

Insert the DVD into the slot with the label side

facing up. The DVD will be guided automatically

into the slot.

If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, the

DVD player will automatically turn on.

CAUTION

Do not force the compact disc into the

slot. This could damage the player.

MODE select button:

Press the MODE button to select Audio/Video

source between DVD and AUX input (input jacks

on the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input,

White = left channel audio input, and Yellow =

Video input).

The display will show the “AUX” in the upper left

corner of the display for 4 seconds once the

Mode is changed to AUX.

To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary input

jacks” in this section.

PLAY:

When the PLAY button on the remote

control is pressed, the player will play.

In play mode, the display will briefly show

on the upper left corner of the display.

FF (Fast Forward), REW:

Press (fast forward) / (Rewind) but-

tons to carry out the fast forward or rewind pre-

sentation at 5 times normal play speed.

Press (fast forward) / (Rewind) but-

tons again or PLAY button to resume the normal

play speed.

LHA0974

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

NEXT CHAPTER/

PREVIOUS CHAPTER:

When the (NEXT CHAPTER) button is

pressed while the DVD is being played, the pro-

gram next to the present one will start to play from

its beginning. Press several times to skip through

programs. The DVD will advance the number of

times the button is pressed. When the

(PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button is pressed, the

program being played returns to its beginning.

Press several times to skip back through pro-

grams. The DVD will go back the number of times

the button is pressed.

PAUSE:

When the PAUSE button on the remote

control is pressed, the player will pause playing of

the media. In pause mode, the player will

show on the upper left corner of the dis-

play until the player is changed to another mode.

STOP:

Press the STOP button once to stop playing the

media. The display will show in the upper

left corner of the display for 4 seconds, and the

last disc position will be stored. When the PLAY

button is pressed again, it will resume at the

stored disc track and time position.

If the STOP button is pressed again when the

player is already in Stop mode, it will reinitialize

the pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect it

will ignore the last stored disc position and upon

receipt of the next play message it will begin at

the Title Menu, or at “the beginning of the disc”.

DISPLAY:

If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than 2

seconds, the display menu will appear on the

screen.

●The display menu will remain on the screen

for 10 seconds if no subsequent control

activations occur.

●Use NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate within

the display menu, and use ENTER to select

the item.

NAVIGATION KEYS:

If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVI-

GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,

Down, Left, and Right within the menu.

If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATION

KEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,

and Right within the menu.

ENTER:

In MENU mode, press the ENTER button to se-

lect MENU items.

In the display menu, press the ENTER button to

select items for modification, as per the on-

screen instructions.

MENU:

If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENU

button is pressed, the DVD menu will appear on

the screen. Use Navigation Keys to navigate

within the menu, and use ENTER to select the

item.

Press the MENU button again to return to PLAY

mode.

TITLE:

Press TITLE button to return the DVD media to

the “title” of the DVD.

Press TITLE button again to return to the previous

stop point and play.

BACK:

Press the BACK button to exit the current active

menu and return to the previous menu.

SUBTITLE:

Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitle

selection menu.

Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cycle

through each available subtitle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

AUDIO:

Press the AUDIO button to call up audio menu.

Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cycle

through each available audio track.

ANGLE:

Press the ANGLE button to call up camera angle

menu.

Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cycle

through each available angle.

CLEAR:

Press the CLEAR button to clear all numeric

inputs, if actuated prior to expiration of the

3-second timer.

NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10):

Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly access

disc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting their

numeric value.

The “≥10” button input numbers greater than or

equal to 10, allowing up three digits to be input

for selecting chapter/title/track number.

The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons will

continuously shift the previously input number to

the “left”.

The chapter/title/track number will be automati-

cally selected (if valid, based on media content) if

3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs.

The operator can cancel the input

chapter/title/track number by actuating the

CLEAR control prior to the expiration of the

3-second timer.

These functions can be used only for the DVD

discs which correspond to them.

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean the

surfaces of your NISSAN Mobile Entertainment

System (DVD player face, screen, remote control,

etc.).

Do not attempt to use the system in extreme

temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or

above 158°F (70°C)].

Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme

humidity conditions (less than 10% or more than

75%).

CAUTION

●Do not use any solvents or cleaning

solutions when cleaning the video

system.

●Do not use excessive force on the moni-

tor screen.

●Avoid touching or scratching the moni-

tor screen as it may become dirty or

damaged.

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD

CAUTION

●Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touch

the surface of the disc.

●To clean a disc, wipe the surface from

the center to the outer edge using a

clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc

using a circular motion.

●Do not use a conventional record

cleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol in-

tended for industrial use.

●A new disc may be rough on its inner

and outer edges. Remove the rough

edges using the side of a pen or pencil

as illustrated.

●Never attempt to use a DVD that has

been cracked, deformed, or repaired

using adhesive. Doing so may cause

damage to the equipment.

●Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami-

nation or flaws. Otherwise, signals may not

be read properly.

●Do not write, draw or attach anything on any

side of the DVD.

●Do not store the DVD in locations with direct

sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.

●Always place discs in the storage case when

they are not being used.

●Do not put on any sticker or write anything

on either surface of the DVD.

DVD player operation precautions

Do not use the following DVDs as they may

cause the DVD player to malfunction:

●3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter.

LHA0049

LHA0484

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●DVDs with a region code other than

“1”. The region code s

Ais displayed in

a small symbol printed on the top of

the DVD s

●DVDs that are not round.

●DVDs with a paper label.

●DVDs that are warped, scratched, or

have unequal edges.

●Recordable digital video discs

(DVD+R).

●Rewritable digital video discs

(DVD+RW).

If a DVD with a paper label is used and

becomes jammed, you may be able to reset

the unit and eject the jammed disc with the

following procedure:

1. Record the radio presets.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal from

the battery for five minutes.

3. Reconnect the negative battery termi-

nal.

4. Check to see if the jammed DVD has

been ejected. If it has not, try to eject

the DVD by pushing the eject button.

5. If the disc cannot be ejected see your

NISSAN dealer for further assistance.

6. Re-program the radio presets.

Remote control and headphones

battery replacement

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid.

2. Replace batteries with new ones.

●Size AA (remote control)

●Size AAA (headphones)

Make sure that the and ends on

the batteries match the markings inside the

compartment.

3. Close the lid securely.

LHA0318

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, close the lid se-

curely.

●If you will not be using the remote control for

long periods of time, remove the batteries.

●Replacement of the batteries is needed

when the remote control only functions at

extremely close distances to the DVD player

or not at all.

●Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.

●An improperly disposed battery can harm

the environment. Always confirm local regu-

lations for battery disposal.

●When changing batteries, do not let dust or

oil get on the remote control and head-

phones.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment. This device complies

with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210

of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of the

device.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in

your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following

precautions, otherwise the new equipment may

adversely affect the engine control system and

other electronic parts.

WARNING

●A cellular telephone should not be used

while driving so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation. Some juris-

dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-

phones while driving.

●If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode (if so

equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-

ercise extreme caution at all times so

full attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

●If a conversation in a moving vehicle

requires you to take notes, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop your

vehicle before doing so.

SAA0723

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CAUTION

●Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

●Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic con-

trol system harnesses. Do not route the

antenna wire next to any harness.

●Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio

as recommended by the manufacturer.

●Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

●For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

●Do not ground electrical accessories

directly to the battery terminal. Doing

so, will bypass the variable voltage con-

trol system and the vehicle battery may

not charge completely. Refer to “Vari-

able voltage control system” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion later in this manual.

●Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

WARNING

●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a

phone while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle before

doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

BLUETOOTHTHANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Your NISSAN is equipped with the BluetoothT

Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner

of a BluetoothTenabled cellular phone, you can

set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With BluetoothTwireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with

your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-

vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-

ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-

matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

module when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position with the paired cellular phone turned

on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different BluetoothT

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the

phone commands, so dialing a phone number

using your voice is possible. For more details, see

“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” later in this

section.

Before using the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●Set up the wireless connection between a

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module before using the hands-free phone

system.

●Some BluetoothTenabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list.

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-

vice area.

WHA0977

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive cellular signal; such as

in a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a moun-

tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

●When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-

ing a call.

●Immediately after the ignition switch is

pushed to the ON position or the DVD-ROM

for the navigation system is inserted into the

player, it may be impossible to receive a call

for a short period of time.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the BluetoothTwireless connection, the bat-

tery power of the cellular phone may dis-

charge quicker than usual. The BluetoothT

Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge

cellular phones.

●If the hands-free phone system seems to be

malfunctioning, please refer to “Trouble-

shooting guide” later in this section. You can

also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for

troubleshooting help.

●Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual

regarding the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

●The signal strength display on the monitor

will not coincide with the signal strength

display of some cellular phones.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) this device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex-

posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-

ronment. This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 8 inches (20

cm) between the radiator and your body. This

Transmitter must not be co-located or operating

in conjunction with any other antenna or transmit-

ter.

VOICE COMMANDS

You can use voice commands to operate various

BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System features

using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For

more details, see 9NISSAN Voice Recognition

System9later in this section.

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

PAIRING PROCEDURE

1. Press the SETTING button, then select the

“Phone” key using the NISSAN controller

and press the ENTER button.

2. Scroll to the bottom of the list and select the

“Bluetooth Setup”key and press the ENTER

button.

3. Select the “Pair Phone” key and press the

ENTER button, then select one of the “None

(Add New)” keys by pressing the ENTER

button.

NOTE:

If pairing a phone for the first time, press-

ing the PHONE button twice will bring you

to the pair phone list.

4. When a PIN code appears on the screen,

operate the BluetoothTcellular phone to

enter the PIN code. The pairing procedure of

the cellular phone varies according to each

cellular phone manufacturer. See the cellular

phone owner’s manual for the details.

5. When the pairing is completed, the screen

will return to the BluetoothTsetup display.

LHA0884 LHA0978 LHA0979

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

LHA0980 LHA0981 LHA0982

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

PHONEBOOK

Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in the

phonebook.

1. Press the SETTING button, then select the

“Phone” key and press the ENTER button.

2. Select the “Phonebook” key and press the

ENTER button.

3. Select one of the “None (Add New)” keys

from the name list of the phonebook and

press the ENTER button.

4. Select the “Transfer via Bluetooth” key in

order to transfer a phonebook entry from

your cellular phone to your phonebook in

your car.

5. Operate the cellular phone to send a per-

son’s name and phone number from the

memory of the cellular phone. The memory

sending procedure from the cellular phone

varies according to each cellular phone

manufacturer. See the cellular phone own-

er’s manual for more details.

6. After the download is registered in the

phonebook, the system will ask if you want to

add a voice tag for it. The Voice Tag screen

will be displayed.

If you want to add a voice tag select the

“Yes” key and press the ENTER button. For

example, if the person’s name is David,

speak “David” while the Store voice tag

screen is on the display. The David voice tag

is stored in the phonebook. Voice tag is a

useful function for easy dialing supported by

the voice recognition system. For more infor-

mation, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition

System” later in this section.

LHA0978 LHA0983 LHA0984

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

7. When the phonebook download is com-

pleted, the screen will return to the name list

of the phonebook.

There are different methods to input a phone

number. Select one of the following options in-

stead of the “Transfer via Bluetooth” key in step 4

above.

Enter Data by Keypad:

Input the name and phone number manually us-

ing the keypad displayed on the screen. For in-

formation on how to use the touch screen, see

“How to use the touch screen” earlier in this

section..

Copy from Downloaded Phonebook:

Copy a phonebook from the BluetoothTcellular

phone. The availability of this function depends

on each cellular phone. The copying procedure

from the cellular phone also varies according to

each cellular phone. See the cellular phone own-

er’s manual for more details.

Copy from Outgoing Call Logs:

Store the name and phone number from the

outgoing call list.

Copy from Incoming Call Logs:

Store the name and phone number from the

incoming call list.

Transfer via Bluetooth:

Transfer a contact from the BluetoothTcellular

phone. Availability of this function depends on

each cellular phone. The transferring procedure

from the cellular phone also varies according to

each cellular phone. See the cellular phone own-

er’s manual for more details.

Delete:

Delete a contact that is registered in the phone-

book.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedures below.

1. Press the PHONE button on the instrument

panel.

2. Touch the “Call (Phonebook)” key.

3. Touch one of the downloaded person’s key

from the list. Dialing will start.

4. After the call is over, perform one of the

following to finish the call.

a. Touch the “Hang Up” key.

b. Press and hold the phone button on the

steering wheel switches.

LHA0985 LHA0986

4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

c. Press the PHONE button on the instrument

panel.

There are different methods to make a call. Select

one of the following options instead of the “Call

(Phonebook)” key in step 2 above.

Redial:

Dial the previously dialed number again.

Call (Call Logs):

Select the name or phone number from the in-

coming or outgoing call logs.

Call (Downloaded):

Select the name or phone number from the

downloaded call list.

Dial (Keypad):

Input the phone number manually using the key-

pad displayed on the screen. For information on

how to use the touch screen, see “How to use the

touch screen” earlier in this section.

RECEIVING A CALL

When you hear a phone ring, the display will

change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow

the one of the procedures listed below.

a. Touch the “Answer” key on the display.

b. Press the PHONE button on the instrument

panel.

c. Press the phone button on the steering

wheel switches.

There are some options available when receiving

a call. Select one of the following displayed on

the screen.

Answer:

Accept an incoming call to talk.

On Hold:

Put an incoming call on hold.

Reject Call:

Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, follow one of the procedures

listed below.

a. Touch the “Reject Call” key on the display.

b. Press the PHONE button on the instrument

panel.

c. Press and hold the phone button on the

steering wheel switches.

LHA0987

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

DURING A CALL

There are some options available during a call.

Select one of the following displayed on the

screen if necessary.

Hang up:

Finish the call.

Use Handset:

Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

Mute:

Mute your voice to the person.

Dial (Keypad):

Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed.

For example, entering your PIN number for voice-

mail.

Cancel Mute:

This will appear after the “Mute” key is touched.

Mute will be cancelled.

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or

quieter, press the volume control switch located

on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume

control knob on the instrument panel while talking

on the phone. This adjustment is also available in

the SETTING mode.

PHONE SETTING

To set up the hands-free phone system to your

preferred settings, press the SETTING button,

then touch the “Phone” key on the display.

Phonebook:

See “Phonebook” earlier in this section for add-

ing, editing and deleting a contact.

Downloaded Phonebook:

See the following information for each item.

LHA0988 LHA0978

4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Download All:

Transfer phonebook entries from your cellu-

lar phone to the vehicle’s phonebook. For

more information, see “Phonebook down-

load” earlier in this section.

●Delete Downloaded Phonebook:

Delete all of the downloaded phonebook

entries.

●Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone-

book:

Delete a single entry from the downloaded

phonebook. Touch the corresponding letter

key, then touch on the name key you wish to

delete. Touch the “Yes” key to delete the

entry.

Automatic Hold:

If this item is turned on, an incoming call will be

placed on hold automatically after several rings.

Use Vehicle Ringtone:

If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that is

different from the cellular phone’s will sound

when receiving a call.

Delete Call Logs:

Delete all the outgoing or incoming call logs from

the list.

Bluetooth Setup:

See the following information for each item.

●Bluetooth:

If this item is turned off, the connection be-

tween the cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module will be canceled.

●Bluetooth Info:

Check information about the device name,

vehicle name, device address device PIN

and connection status.

●Pair Phone:

See “Pairing Procedure” in this section.

●Priority Change

If multiple phones are registered to the sys-

tem, you can change the priority of the

phones on the shown list.

LHA0979 LHA0980

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Remove Paired Phone:

Delete a registered cellular phone from the

paired list.

●Paired Phone List:

Up to 5 registered cellular phones are

shown on the list.

●Edit Phone Name:

If you would like to change the way your

phone’s name is displayed, select this key; a

character input screen will be displayed.

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows

hands-free operation of the systems equipped on

this vehicle, such as the display, audio, climate

control, DVD, phone and navigation systems.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press

the button located on the steering wheel.

Then speak the command for the system you

wish to activate. The command given is picked up

by the microphone, and it is performed when it is

properly recognized. At this time NISSAN Voice

Recognition will provide a voice and message (in

the center display) to inform you of the command

results.

COMMAND LIST

Displaying command list

If you are controlling the system by voice com-

mands for the first time or do not know the

appropriate voice command, perform the follow-

ing procedure for displaying the voice command

list and help list.

1. Press the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Touch the “Others” key, then touch the

“Voice Recognition” key.

3. Touch the “Command List” key.

4. Touch one of the category keys.

5. Touch one of the item keys in the category; a

command list will be shown.

6. If necessary, scroll the screen by touching

the “DOWN” key or the “UP” key to view the

entire list.

LHA0989 LHA0892

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

7. Press the BACK button to return to the

previous screen.

For information on how to use the touch screen,

see “How to use the touch screen” earlier in this

section.

LHA0908 LHA0899 LHA0990

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

LHA0991 LHA0992

4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

List of help commands

Navigation help:

See the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual for details.

Audio help:

●Music Box

COMMAND ACTION

Music Box Play Turns on the Music Box hard-disk drive audio system.

Play by Mood Plays the specified song matching your mood.

Relaxing Music Plays the specified relaxing music.

Lively Music Plays the specified lively music.

Slow Music Plays the specified slow music.

Upbeat Music Plays the specified upbeat music.

Play by Category Plays the specified song in the specified category.

My Favorites Plays your favorite song.

Hit Songs Plays the specified hit song.

Kids’ Songs Plays the specified song for children.

Rarely Played Plays a rarely played song.

Music Box OFF Turns off the Music Box.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Radio

– Radio

COMMAND ACTION

Radio Play Turns the radio on, selecting the station and band last played.

Radio AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

Radio FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

Tune <87.7 - 107.9> Tunes to the specified FM frequency.

Tune <530 - 1710> Tunes to the specified AM frequency.

Preset <A - C> <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset <A - C> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset bank.

Radio OFF Turns the radio off.

Radio Menu Displays the radio menu.

– Satellite (if so equipped)

COMMAND ACTION

Satellite Radio Turns the SAT radio on, selecting the station and band last played.

Satellite Radio Channel <1 - 255> Tunes to the specified SAT frequency.

Preset <A - C> <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset <A - C> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset bank.

Radio OFF Turns the radio off.

Radio Menu Displays the radio menu.

4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●DVD (if so equipped)

NOTE:

DVD commands are available while a DVD is being played.

COMMAND ACTION

DVD Play Turns the DVD player on, selecting the track last played.

DVD Stop Stops playing the DVD.

Track <1 to 99> Switches to the specified DVD track.

Chapter <1 to 999> Switches to the specified DVD chapter.

Title <1 to 99> Switches to the specified DVD title.

Title <1 to 99> Chapter <1 to 999> Switches to the specified DVD title on the specified chapter.

Group <1 to 9> Switches to the specified DVD group.

Group <1 to 9> Play Track <1 to 99> Switches to the specified DVD group on the specified track.

Menu Skip DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly.

Menu Skip OFF Turns off the menu skip.

DVD OFF Turns the DVD player off.

DVD Menu Switches to the specified DVD menu.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●CD

COMMAND ACTION

CD Play Starts to play a CD.

Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track.

Folder <1 - 255> Selects the specified MP3 folder and plays the first file.

Folder <1 - 255> Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track on the specified MP3 folder.

CD OFF Stops the CD playback.

CD Text Displays the information about the track currently being played.

CD Menu Displays the CD menu.

●Others

– Audio

COMMAND ACTION

Audio Play Turns the audio system on.

Audio OFF Turns the audio system off.

4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

–CF

COMMAND ACTION

Compact Flash Play Starts to play the files saved in the CompactFlash™ card.

Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track.

Folder <1 - 255> Selects the specified folder in the CompactFlash™ card and plays the first file.

Folder <1 - 255> Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track in the specified folder in the CompactFlash™ card.

Compact Flash OFF Stops the playback of the CompactFlash™ card.

Compact Flash Text Displays the information about the file currently being played.

Compact Flash Menu Displays the CompactFlash™ menu.

Phone help:

COMMAND ACTION

Phone Redial Redials the phone number last dialed.

Phone Dial Dials the phone number given in the command.

Phone Dial <Phone number> Dials the phone number given in the command. Speak the phone number in one sequence. The number is automatically dialed.

Phonebook Shows the first page of the Phonebook list.

Phonebook< Voicetag> Dials the phone number registered in the specified “voicetag”.

Outgoing Calls Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5).

Incoming Calls Shows the incoming call history (1 to 5).

Phone Select Selects another cellular phone registered in the system.

Play Phonebook Outputs the “Voicetags” registered in the system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Climate control help:

COMMAND ACTION

Climate Control Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode.

Climate Control OFF Turns the climate control system off.

Temperature <60 - 90> or <18 - 32°C> Sets the climate control temperature to the value given in the command.

Driver Temperature <60 - 90> or <18 - 32°C> Sets the driver’s side temperature to the value given in the command.

Passenger Temperature <60 - 90> or <18 - 32°C> Sets the passenger’s side temperature to the value given in the command.

Others help:

●Vehicle

COMMAND ACTION

Fuel Economy Displays the Fuel Economy screen.

Trip Computer Displays the Trip Computer screen.

Maintenance Displays the Maintenance screen.

Tire Pressure Displays the Tire Pressure screen.

Status Displays the Status screen.

●Help

COMMAND ACTION

Help Displays the command list option screen.

4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Displaying the user guide

You can confirm how to use voice commands by

displaying a simplified User Guide or by display-

ing simulated voice command operations.

1. Press the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Touch the “Others” key, then touch the

“Voice Recognition” key.

3. Touch the “User Guide” key.

Available items:

●Getting Started

Displays the simplified User Guide describ-

ing how to operate the voice recognition

system.

●Placing Calls

Simulates voice commands to make a phone

call by voice command operation.

●Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips for how to correctly

speak commands in order for them to be

properly recognized by the system.

●Voice Recognition Settings

Displays the description of voice recognition

settings.

●Adapting the System to Your Voice

Simulates an example of the operation to

adapt the system to your voice.

For the items “Using the Address Book” and

“Finding a Street Address”, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual for details.

For information on how to use the touch screen,

see “How to use the touch screen” earlier in this

section.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which

takes a few seconds. When completed, the sys-

tem is ready to accept voice commands. If

the button is pressed before the initializa-

tion completes, the display will show the mes-

sage: “Phonetic data downloaded. Please wait.”

LHA0993 LHA0994

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of NISSAN

Voice Recognition, observe the following:

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate the

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

●When the climate control is in the AUTO

mode, the fan speed decreases automati-

cally for easy recognition.

●Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

●Start speaking a command within 1.5 sec-

onds after the tone sounds.

●Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

Giving voice commands

1. Press the button s

2. The system announces: “Please say a com-

mand after a tone.”

3. After the tone sounds and the face icon of

the display changes, speak a command. For

additional information, see “List of help com-

mands” earlier in this section.

4. Voice and message feedback will be pro-

vided when the command is accepted.

●If the command is not recognized, the sys-

tem announces: “Please say again.” Repeat

the command in a clear voice.

LHA0995 LHA0996

4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●If you want to cancel the command, press

and hold the button for 2 seconds

during feedback. The system will announce:

“Voice cancelled.”

●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, push the volume control

switch or the on the steering

wheel while being provided with the feed-

back.

Operating tips

●Voice commands cannot be accepted when

the face icon in the display is gray.

●If the command is not recognized, the sys-

tem announces, “Please say again”. Repeat

the command in a clear voice.

●Press the BACK button once to return to the

previous screen.

●If you want to cancel the command, press

and hold the TALK button for 1 sec-

ond. The message “Voice canceled” will be

announced.

●Press the TALK button again to pause

the operation. Press the TALK button

to restart the operation.

●If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-

tem feedback, push the volume control

switch or on the steering wheel

or use the audio system volume knob while

the system is making an announcement.

SYSTEM FEATURES

NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the fol-

lowing systems:

●Navigation (if so equipped)

●Audio (radio and CD)

●DVD Mobile Entertainment System

●BluetoothTHands-Free Phone

●Climate Control

●Vehicle Systems

For additional information on the navigation sys-

tem, see the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer

to the following examples.

General rule: Either “zero”or “oh” can be used for

“0”.

Radio frequencies:

Speak radio frequencies according to the follow-

ing examples:

●930 kHz

– “Tune nine thirty AM”

– “Tune nine thirty”

●1000 kHz

– “Tune one thousand”

●1040 kHz

– “Tune ten forty”

●1710 kHz

– “Tune seventeen ten”

●97.9 MHz

– “Tune ninety seven point nine”

●100.5 MHz

– “Tune one hundred point five”

●101.1 MHz

– “Tune one oh one point one FM”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Temperatures (climate control):

Speak temperatures according to the following

examples:

●74°F

– “Temperature seventy four”

●21.5°C

– “Temperature twenty one point five”

– “Temperature twenty one and a half”

●19.0°C

– “Temperature nineteen point zero”

– “Temperature nineteen point oh.”

– “Temperature nineteen”

Phone numbers:

Speak phone numbers according to the following

examples:

●1-800-662-6200

●say “Dial” or “Phone dial” the system will

respond with “Please say the first group of

numbers”, then say:

– “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”,

– “one eight hundred six six two six two oh

oh”, or

– “one eight zero zero six six two six two oh

oh”.

Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone

dialing results, say phone numbers as single dig-

its.

Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five

five six thousand”.

Personal vocabulary (voicetags)

NISSAN Voice Recognition provides the function

called “voicetags”, which can be associated with

the phone and the navigation system (if so

equipped). Using your own voice, 40 voicetags

can be registered in the “Phonebook” (phone)

and 20 locations can be registered in the “Ad-

dress Book” (navigation system).

For additional information, see “BluetoothT

Hands-Free Phone System”earlier in this section

and/or the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped) for the method of “voic-

etag” registration.

VOICE COMMAND LEARNING

FUNCTION

The voice recognition system has a function to

learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition

performance. The system can memorize the

voices of up to three persons.

LHA0884

4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Having the system learn the user’s

voice

1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel, touch the “Others” key on the

display.

2. Touch the “Voice Recognition” key.

3. Touch the “Voice Command Learning” key.

4. Touch one of the User number keys to have

your voice memorized by the system as that

user.

5. Touch a category to be learned by the sys-

tem from the following list:

●Audio

●Phone

●Vehicle Info.

●Others

The voice commands in the category are dis-

played.

LHA0909 LHA0910 LHA0997

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

6. Touch a voice command. The voice recogni-

tion system starts. 7. The system requests that you repeat a com-

mand after a tone.

8. After the tone sounds and the face icon on

the screen changes from to gray to orange,

speak the command that the system re-

quested.

9. When the system has recognized the voice

command, the voice of the user is learned.

Press the BACK button to return to the previous

screen. If the system has learned the command

correctly, the voice command indicator on the

screen turns on.

LHA0998 LHA1000 LHA0999

4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Learning function settings

While inside the Voice Command Learning

screen, touch the “Setting” key to enable the

following items:

●Edit Name:

Edit the user name using the keypad dis-

played on the screen.

●Store Result:

When this item is turned to ON, the voice

recognition system can easily recognize the

user’s voice that it has learned.

●Reset Result:

Resets the user’s voice that the voice recog-

nition system has learned.

●Continuous Learning:

When this item is turned to ON, you can

have the system learn the voice commands

in succession, without selecting commands

one by one.

VOICE RECOGNITION SETTINGS

Press the SETTING button, then touch the “Oth-

ers” key, then touch the “Voice Recognition” key;

the voice recognition settings screen will appear.

Command List:

For information, see “List of help commands”

earlier in this section.

Minimize Voice Feedback:

When this item is enabled (indicator is illumi-

nated), vocal feedback during voice recognition

is reduced when the system is activated.

LHA1001 LHA0884

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Voice Command Learning:

For information, see “Voice command learning

function” earlier in this section.

User Guide:

For information, see “Displaying the user guide”

earlier in this section.

LHA0909 LHA0910

4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are en-

countered, follow the solutions given in this guide

for the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number. Try

each solution in turn, starting with number one,

until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution

Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOG-

NIZED” or the system fails to interpret the

command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid. See Command list in this section.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

The system consistently selects the wrong

voicetag.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by giving the Address Book Directory

or Phone Directory command.

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving................5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................5-2

Three-way catalyst..............................5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........5-3

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ....................................5-5

Avoiding collision and rollover....................5-5

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving................5-6

Driving safety precautions .......................5-6

Ignition switch.....................................5-8

Intelligent Key System (if so equipped) ............5-8

Ignition switch positions.........................5-9

Automatic transmission.........................5-10

Key positions .................................5-10

Nissan vehicle immobilizer system ...............5-11

Before starting the engine .........................5-11

Starting the engine ...............................5-11

Driving the vehicle ................................5-12

Automatic transmission.........................5-12

Parking brake ....................................5-17

Cruise control....................................5-18

Precautions on cruise control ...................5-18

Cruise control operations.......................5-18

Break-in schedule ................................5-20

Increasing fuel economy...........................5-20

Using four wheel drive (4WD) .............5-21

Parking/parking on hills............................5-30

Power steering ...................................5-31

Brake system ....................................5-31

Brake precautions .............................5-31

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).................5-32

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system ..............5-33

Hill descent control system (if so equipped) .........5-34

Hill start assist (HSA) system (if so equipped) .......5-35

Cold weather driving..............................5-36

Freeing a frozen door lock ......................5-36

Anti-freeze....................................5-36

Battery .......................................5-36

Draining of coolant water .......................5-36

Tire equipment ................................5-36

Special winter equipment.......................5-36

Driving on snow or ice .........................5-36

Engine block heater (if so equipped).............5-37

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WARNING

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

●Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-

ous. It can cause unconsciousness or

death.

●If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all win-

dows fully open, and have the vehicle

inspected immediately.

●Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

●Do not park the vehicle with the engine

running for any extended length of time.

●Keep the lift gate and rear windows

closed while driving, otherwise exhaust

gases could be drawn into the passen-

ger compartment. If you must drive with

the lift gate or rear windows open, fol-

low these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton (if so equipped) to off and the fan

control dial to 4 (high) to circulate

the air.

●If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through

the seal on the lift gate or the body,

follow the manufacturer’s recommen-

dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-

try into the vehicle.

●The exhaust system and body should be

inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system, un-

derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

●The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, animals

or flammable materials away from the

exhaust system components.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

CAUTION

●Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to

help reduce exhaust pollutants.

●Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-

ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-

able loss of performance or other un-

usual operating conditions are

detected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly by a NISSAN dealer.

●Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause

the engine to misfire, damaging the

three-way catalyst.

●Do not race the engine while warming it

up.

●Do not push or tow your vehicle to start

the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and in-

flated to the inflation pressure recommended by

the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has

tires of a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,

you should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-

heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation

also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and

may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping

ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-

function indicator is combined with the low tire

pressure telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-

function exists. When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-

ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Additional information:

●The TPMS does not monitor the tire pres-

sure of the spare tire.

Starting and driving 5-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle

is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25

km/h). Also, this system may not detect a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a

flat tire while driving).

●The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)

to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

●Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation

and the outside temperature. Low outside

temperature can lower the temperature of

the air inside the tire which can cause a

lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-

nate. If the warning light illuminates in low

ambient temperature, check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires.

●You can also check the pressure of all tires

(except the spare tire) on the display screen.

The order of the tire pressure figures dis-

played on the screen does not correspond

with the actual order of the tire position. See

“Tire pressure information” in the “Display

screen, heater, air conditioner and audio

systems” section.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressure

warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”

section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an acci-

dent and could result in serious per-

sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for

all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case

of emergency” section for changing a

flat tire.)

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, tire pressure will not be

indicated, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This

may cause poor reception of the signals

from the tire pressure sensors, and the

TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-

minate.

5-4 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio

frequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation of the device.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passen-

ger cars to make them capable of performing in a

variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.

This gives them a higher center of gravity than

ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground

clearance is a better view of the road, allowing

you to anticipate problems. However, they are not

designed for cornering at the same speeds as

conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more

than low-slung sports cars are designed to per-

form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at

all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As

with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate

this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control

or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more likely to die than a

person wearing a seat belt.

Be sure to read the driving safety precautions

later in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss of

control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-

neuvers, because these driving practices could

cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with

any vehicle, loss of control could result in a

collision with other vehicles or objects, or

cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if

the loss of control causes the vehicle to

slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and

avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under

the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which may

cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt

as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of this

manual, and also instruct your passengers to do

so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-

sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is

Starting and driving 5-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol

or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-

duces coordination, delays reaction time

and impairs judgement. Driving after

drinking alcohol increases the likelihood

of being involved in an accident injuring

yourself and others. Additionally, if you

are injured in an accident, alcohol can

increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influence

of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-

though the local laws vary on what is considered

to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

affects all people differently and most people

underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And

that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-

scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your

ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-

hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and

off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-

ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for

leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-

hicle.

Remember that two-wheel drive models are less

capable than four-wheel drive models for rough

road driving and extrication when stuck in deep

snow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

●Drive carefully when off the road and

avoid dangerous areas. Every person

who drives or rides in this vehicle

should be seated with their seat belt

fastened. This will keep you and your

passengers in position when driving

over rough terrain.

●Do not drive across steep slopes. In-

stead drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can

tip over sideways much more easily

than they can forward or backward.

●Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.

If you drive up them, you may stall. If

you drive down them, you may not be

able to control your speed. If you drive

across them, you may roll over.

●Do not shift gears while driving on

downhill grades as this could cause

loss of control of the vehicle.

●Stay alert when driving to the top of a

hill. At the top there could be a drop-off

or other hazard that could cause an

accident.

●If your engine stalls or you cannot make

it to the top of a steep hill, never at-

tempt to turn around. Your vehicle

could tip or roll over. Always back

straight down in R (Reverse) gear. Never

back down in N (Neutral) or with the

clutch depressed (manual transmission

vehicles), using only the brake, as this

could cause loss of control.

●Heavy braking going down a hill could

cause your brakes to overheat and fade,

resulting in loss of control and an acci-

dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low

gear to control your speed. Use the Hill

Descent Control feature (if so

equipped).

5-6 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Unsecured cargo can be thrown around

when driving over rough terrain. Prop-

erly secure all cargo so it will not be

thrown forward and cause injury to you

or your passengers.

●To avoid raising the center of gravity

excessively, do not exceed the rated

capacity of the roof rack/gear bin (if so

equipped) and evenly distribute the

load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo

area as far forward and as low as pos-

sible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires

larger than specified in this manual.

This could cause your vehicle to roll

over.

●Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel when driving off-road.

The steering wheel could move sud-

denly and injure your hands. Instead

drive with your fingers and thumbs on

the outside of the rim.

●Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers have

their seat belts fastened.

●Always drive with the floor mats in

place as the floor may become hot.

●Lower your speed when encountering

strong crosswinds. With a higher center

of gravity, your NISSAN is more af-

fected by strong side winds. Slower

speeds ensure better vehicle control.

●Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires, even with 4WD

engaged.

●For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

●Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped

vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer

(such as the dynamometers used by

some states for emissions testing), or

similar equipment even if the other two

wheels are raised off the ground. Make

sure you inform test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may

result in drivetrain damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage or per-

sonal injury.

●Accelerating quickly, sharp steering

maneuvers or sudden braking may

cause loss of control.

●If at all possible, avoid sharp turning

maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.

Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehicle

has a higher center of gravity than a

two-wheel drive vehicle. The vehicle is

not designed for cornering at the same

speeds as conventional two-wheel

drive vehicles. Failure to operate this

vehicle correctly could result in loss of

control and/or a rollover accident.

Starting and driving 5-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,

or radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Install tire chains on the rear

wheels when driving on slippery roads

and drive carefully.

●Be sure to check the brakes immedi-

ately after driving in mud or water. See

“Brake system” later in this section for

“Wet brakes”.

●Avoid parking your vehicle on steep

hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it

rolls forward, backward or sideways,

you could be injured.

●Whenever you drive off-road through

sand, mud or water as deep as the

wheel hub, more frequent maintenance

may be required. See “Periodic mainte-

nance” in the “NISSAN Service and

Maintenance Guide.”

WARNING

●Never remove or turn the key to the

LOCK position while driving. The steer-

ing wheel will lock. This may cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle and

could result in serious vehicle damage

or personal injury.

●Never turn the ignition switch to the

LOCK position while driving. The steer-

ing wheel will lock. This may cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle and

could result in serious vehicle damage

or personal injury.

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so

equipped)

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch cannot be turned to LOCK until the selec-

tor lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

When turning the ignition switch, make sure the

selector lever is in the P (Park) position.

If the selector lever is not returned to the P (Park)

position, the ignition switch cannot be moved

toward LOCK.

When the ignition switch cannot be turned to-

ward the LOCK position while keeping the Intel-

ligent Key within range, proceed as follows:

LSD0171

IGNITION SWITCH

5-8 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON

direction.

3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position.

The selector lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the foot brake pedal is

depressed.

There is an OFF position in between LOCK and

ACC, although it does not show on the lock

cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF the steering

wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclock-

wise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignition

switch to the LOCK position. To unlock the

steering wheel, push the ignition switch in

and turn it gently while rotating the steer-

ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the battery of the vehicle equipped with

the Intelligent Key system is discharged,

the ignition switch cannot be turned from

the LOCK position, even using the me-

chanical key.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS

Push in the ignition switch to the s

Bposition

when you turn it.

LOCK (Normal parking position) s

The ignition switch can only be locked in the

LOCK position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is

pushed in, and turned to the ACC position s

while carrying the Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories) s

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ON (Normal operating position) s

This position turns on the ignition system and the

electrical accessories.

START s

This position starts the engine. As soon as the

engine has started, release the knob immediately.

It will automatically return to the ON position.

The ignition switch cannot be turned back to the

LOCK position unless the selector lever is in the

P (Park) position. (It can be turned only to the s

position.)

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition

switch in ACC or ON positions when the

engine is not running for an extended pe-

riod. This can discharge the battery.

Starting and driving 5-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot be

turned to the LOCK position and removed until

the shift selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

When removing the key from the ignition, make

sure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park)

position.

If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park)

position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCK

position.

To remove the key from the ignition switch:

1. Shift the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion with the key in the ON position.

2. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

3. Remove the key from the ignition.

If the selector lever is shifted to the P (Park)

position after the key is turned to the OFF posi-

tion or when the key cannot be turned to the

LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the

key.

1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON

position.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

The shift selector lever is designed so it cannot

moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other

gear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFF

position or if the key is removed from the switch.

The shift selector lever can be moved if the

ignition switch is in the ON position and the

foot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between the

LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position

is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.

When the ignition is in the OFF position,

the steering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise

from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to

the LOCK position. Remove the key. To

unlock the steering wheel, insert the key

and turn it gently while rotating the steer-

ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi-

tion, turn the steering wheel to the left or

right while turning the key to unlock the

key cylinder.

KEY POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Not used) (1)

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and the

electrical accessories.

WSD0041

5-10 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as the

engine has started, release the key. It automati-

cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for

example, when interference is caused by another

registered key, an automated toll road device or

automatic payment device on the key ring), restart

the engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position, and wait approximately 10 sec-

onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recom-

mends placing the registered key on a separate key

ring to avoid interference from other devices.

●Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

●Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as

frequently as possible, or at least whenever

you refuel.

●Check that all windows and lights are clean.

●Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

●Lock all doors.

●Position seat and adjust head restraints.

●Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

●Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

●Check the operation of warning lights when

the key is turned to the ON (3) position. See

“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector lever cannot be

moved out of P (Park) and into any of

the other gear positions if the ignition

key is turned to the OFF position or if

the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

The starter is designed not to operate if

the shift selector lever is in any of the

driving positions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by turning the ignition

key to START. Release the key when the

engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to

run, repeat the above procedure.

●If the engine is very hard to start in ex-

tremely cold weather or when restarting,

depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-

proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it

and then crank the engine. Release the

key and the accelerator pedal when the

engine starts.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●If the engine is very hard to start because

it is flooded, depress the accelerator

pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After

cranking the engine, release the accel-

erator pedal. Crank the engine with your

foot off the accelerator pedal by turn-

ing the ignition key to START. Release the

key when the engine starts. If the engine

starts, but fails to run, repeat the above

procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does

not start, turn the key off and wait 10

seconds before cranking again, otherwise

the starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-

onds after starting. Do not race the engine

while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running for

a minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting it

off. Starting and stopping the engine over a

short period of time may make the vehicle

more difficult to start.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1.

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or

reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

●Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while the vehicle is moving. This could

cause an accident.

CAUTION

●When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-

pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot

brake should be used for this purpose.

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is

electronically controlled to produce maximum

power and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this

transmission are shown on the following pages.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle

performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shift

selector lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

move the shift selector lever into a driving

gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start

the vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed so

the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed

before shifting from P (Park) to any drive

position while the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

The shift selector lever cannot be moved

out of P (Park) and into any of the other

gear positions if the ignition key is turned

to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the

key is removed.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-12 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

To move the selector lever:

: Push the button while depressing the

brake pedal

: Push the button to shift

: Shift without depressing brake pedal or

pushing the button

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal and move the shift selector lever out of the

P (Park) position while pressing the button.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector

lever is in any position while the engine is

not running. Failure to do so could cause

the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll

away and result in serious personal injury

or property damage.

If the switch is turned to the OFF or ACC position

for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral),

or any D (Drive) position, the switch cannot be

turned to the LOCK position and the key (if so

equipped) cannot be removed from the ignition

switch. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position, then the switch can be turned to LOCK.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle is

parked or when starting the engine. Make sure

the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake

pedal should be depressed to move the

selector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive

position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

first, then shift the selector lever into the P (Park)

position.

Type A

LSD0151

Type B

WSD0213

Starting and driving 5-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle is

completely stopped.

Use this position to back up. Make sure the

vehicle is completely stopped before selecting

the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal

must be depressed to move the selector

lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive

position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The

engine can be started in this position. You may

shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine

while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

3 (Third gear) Type A only:

Use this position for driving up and down long

slopes where engine braking would be advanta-

geous.

Do not downshift into the 3 position at speeds

over the following and do not exceed the follow-

ing speeds in the 3 position.

2WD and AUTO:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4H:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4LO:

31 MPH (50 km/h)

2 (Second gear) Type A only:

Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-

ing on downhill grades.

Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds

over the following and do not exceed the follow-

ing speeds in the 2 position.

2WD and AUTO:

71 MPH (115 km/h)

4H:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4LO:

31 MPH (50 km/h)

1 (Low gear) Type A only:

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly

or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,

or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill

grades.

Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds

over the following and do not exceed the follow-

ing speeds in the 1 position.

2WD and AUTO:

43 MPH (70 km/h)

4H:

43 MPH (70 km/h)

4LO:

31 MPH (50 km/h)

5-14 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Manual shift mode (if so equipped)

When the selector lever is shifted from D (Drive)

to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped

or while driving, the transmission enters the

manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected

manually.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-

played on the position indicator in the meter.

When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift

gate, the position indicator displays 1 (First) up to

5 (Fifth) depending on vehicle speed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5

M5 (Fifth):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

M4 (Fourth):

For driving up or down long slopes where engine

braking would be advantageous.

M3 (Third) and M2 (Second):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill

grades.

M1 (First):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly

or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or

mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep

downhill grades.

●Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than M4

range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up:

Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts

to higher range.)

When shifting down:

Move the selector lever to the 2(down) side.

(Shifts to lower range.)

●The transmission will automatically down-

shift the gears. (For example, if you select the

3rd range, the transmission will shift down

between the 3rd and 1st gears.)

●Moving the selector lever rapidly to the same

side twice will shift the ranges in succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode:

Return the selector lever to the D (Drive) position

to return the transmission to the normal driving

mode.

●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear.

This helps maintain driving perfor-

mance and reduces the chance of ve-

hicle damage or loss of control.

●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may shift up automatically to a

higher range than selected if the en-

gine speed is too high. When the ve-

hicle speed decreases, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts down and

shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle

comes to a stop.

WSD0212

Starting and driving 5-15

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift selector lever

may not be moved from the P (Park) position even

with the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector lever, release the shift

lock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N

(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be

locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved

if the battery is discharged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-

lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-

tion and remove the key (if so equipped)

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover as

shown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock

release slot and push down.

5. Press the shift lever button and move the

shift selector lever to the N (Neutral) position

while holding down the shift lock release.

6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position to

unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle

may be moved to the desired location.

If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out of

P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-

matic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be moved from

the P (Park) position while the engine is

running and the brake pedal is depressed,

the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-

ing stop lights could cause an accident

injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift

— in D position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-

erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-

sion down into a lower gear, depending on the

vehicle speed.

Type A

LSD0141

Type B

WSD0214

5-16 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Overdrive switch (if so equipped)

Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis-

sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON.

ON: With the engine running and the

shift selector lever in the D (Drive)

position, the transmission upshifts

into Overdrive as vehicle speed

increases.

Overdrive does not engage until the engine

has reached operating temperature.

OFF: For driving up and down long

slopes where engine braking is nec-

essary push the Overdrive switch

once. The O/D OFF indicator light

in the instrument panel comes on at

this time.

When cruising at a low speed or climbing a

gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shift

shocks as the transmission shifts into and out of

Overdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress the

Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. The

O/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panel

comes on at this time.

When driving conditions change, depress the

Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex-

tended periods of time with the Overdrive off.

This reduces fuel economy.

WARNING

●Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

●Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

●Do not use the gear shift in place of the

parking brake. When parking, be sure

the parking brake is fully engaged.

●Do not leave children unattended in a

vehicle. They could release the parking

brake and cause an accident.

LSD0142

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-17

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it

will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

1. ACCEL/RES switch

2. COAST/SET switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. ON·OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

●If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

cancels automatically. The SET indicator

light in the instrument panel then blinks to

warn the driver.

●If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the

cruise control switch off and have the sys-

tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

●The SET indicator light may blink when the

cruise control switch is turned ON while

pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or

CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise

control system, use the following proce-

dures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving

under the following conditions:

●When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

●In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed.

●On winding or hilly roads.

●On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

●In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-

tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without

keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the main

switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-

ment panel comes on.

LSD0158 LSD0159

CRUISE CONTROL

5-18 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to

the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch

and release it. The SET indicator light in the

instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set

speed.

●To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously

set speed.

●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

when going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods.

●Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator

light in the instrument panel goes out.

●Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light

goes out.

●Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE

indicator light and SET indicator light in the

instrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled and

the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

●you depress the brake pedal while pushing

the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.

The preset speed is deleted from memory.

●the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH

(13 km/h) below the set speed.

●you move the shift selector lever to N (Neu-

tral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods.

●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the COAST/SET switch.

●Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you de-

sire, release the switch.

●Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed in-

creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods.

●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it.

●Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle slows to

the desired speed.

●Push and release the COAST/SET switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed de-

creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-

turns to the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-19

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to obtain

maximum engine performance and en-

sure the future reliability and economy of

your new vehicle. Failure to follow these

recommendations may result in short-

ened engine life and reduced engine

performance.

●Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the

engine over 4,000 rpm.

●Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

●Avoid quick starts.

●Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

●Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts

could be damaged.

●Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain

cruising speeds with a constant accelerator

position.

●Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

●Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.

Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-

hicles.

●Use a proper gear range which suits road

conditions. On level roads, shift into high

gear as soon as possible.

●Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

●Keep your engine tuned up.

●Follow the recommended periodic mainte-

nance schedule.

●Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

●Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire wear and

lowers fuel economy.

●Air conditioner operation lowers fuel

economy. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

●When cruising at highway speeds, it is more

economical to use the air conditioner and

leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

●Use 4H or 4L position only when

necessary. Four-wheel drive operation low-

ers fuel economy.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

5-20 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WARNING

●For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

●Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped

vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer

(such as the dynamometers used by

some states for emissions testing), or

similar equipment even if the other two

wheels are raised off the ground. Make

sure you inform test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may

result in drivetrain damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage or per-

sonal injury.

CAUTION

●Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO

position on dry hard surface roads. Driv-

ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO

may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear

and increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on when

you are driving on dry hard surface

roads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for all mode 4WD

vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift

the transmission selector to the N

position with the brake pedal de-

pressed and shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for part time 4WD

vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift

the transmission selector to the N

position with the brake pedal de-

pressed and shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

●If the warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

●The transfer case may be damaged if

you continue driving with the warning

light blinking rapidly.

All mode 4WD system (if so

equipped)

The all mode 4WD system provides 4 positions

(AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select

the desired drive mode according to the driving

conditions.

USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE

(4WD)

Starting and driving 5-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD Shift

Switch Position Wheels

Driven

Indicator Light Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure

4WD shift Transfer 4LO position

AUTO

Rear

wheels or 4

wheels

For driving on paved or slippery

roads

Move the 4WD switch.

2WD <—> AUTO <—> 4H

4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift position en-

gaged.

IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE TRANSMISSION SE-

LECTOR TO THE (N) POSITION IN THIS OPERATION. PER-

FORM THIS OPERATION WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.

2WD

Rear

wheels

For driving on dry, paved roads

(Economy drive) or state dyna-

mometer I/M testing

4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandy or

snow-covered roads

Neutral

May blink

Neutral disengages the automatic

transmission mechanical parking

lock, which will allow the vehicle

to roll. Do not leave the transfer

shift position in Neutral.*2

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission selector to the (N) position.

3. Depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H with

the brake pedal depressed.

YOU CANNOT MOVE THE TRANSFER 4WD SHIFT SWITCH

BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU

FIRST STOP THE VEHICLE DEPRESS THE BRAKE AND

SHIFT THE TRANSMISSION SELECTOR LEVER TO THE

NEUTRAL (N) POSITION, THEN DEPRESS AND TURN THE

4WD SHIFT SWITCH TO 4LO OR 4H. *3

4LO 4 wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximum power

and traction is required (for ex-

ample: on steep grades or rocky,

sandy, muddy roads)

*1: The transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink. Stop the vehicle. Be sure to shift the 4WD shift switch after the transmission selector has been shifted

to the N position. If the indicator light keeps blinking after the 4WD shift procedure in the previous page, drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a while.

Then the light will turn on or off.

• Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to 4LO. Otherwise gears may grind, damaging the drive system.

*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator

lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light (if so equipped) will

also turn on when 4LO is selected. See “Vehicle dynamic control system” later in this section.

5-22 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to

select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the

driving conditions. There are four types of drive

modes available, AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the

transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to

move between each mode, 2WD, AUTO, 4H and

4LO.

You must depress the switch to select 4LO,

and the vehicle MUST be stationary and the

automatic transmission selector lever in

the N position when changing into or out of

4LO.

WARNING

When parking, apply the parking brake

before stopping the engine and make sure

that the 4WD shift indicator light is on and

the ATP warning light goes off. Otherwise,

the vehicle could unexpectedly move even

if the automatic transmission is in the P

position.

CAUTION

●Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-

tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

●The 4H position provides greater trac-

tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will

cause increased fuel consumption and

higher oil temperatures, and could

damage drivetrain components.

Speeds over 62.5 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H

is not recommended.

●The 4LO position provides maximum

traction. Avoid raising vehicle speed ex-

cessively, as the maximum speed is ap-

proximately 31 MPH (50 km/h).

●When driving straight, shift the 4WD

shift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4H

position. Do not move the 4WD shift

switch when making a turn or reversing.

●Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-

tween 2WD, AUTO and 4H) while driving

on steep downhill grades. Use the en-

gine brake and low automatic transmis-

sion gears (D1 or D2) for engine

braking.

●Do not operate the 4WD shift switch

(between 2WD, AUTO and 4H) with the

rear wheels spinning.

●Do not drive on dry hard surface roads

in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry

hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause

unnecessary noise and tire wear.

NISSAN recommends driving in the

2WD or AUTO position under these

conditions.

●The 4WD transfer case may not be

shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-

bient temperatures and the transfer

4LO position indicator light may blink

even when the 4WD shift switch is

shifted. After driving for a while you can

change the 4WD transfer case between

4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,

●Set the 4WD shift switch to AUTO, 4H or

4LO.

●Drive carefully according to the road surface

conditions.

When the vehicle is stuck,

●Place stones or wooden blocks under the

tires to free the vehicle.

●Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

Starting and driving 5-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeat

forward and backward movement to in-

crease the movement.

●If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tire chains

may be effective.

CAUTION

●Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires

will sink deep into the mud, making it

difficult to free the vehicle.

●Avoid shifting gears with the engine

running at high speeds as this may

cause malfunction.

Part time 4WD system (if so

equipped)

The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions

(2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select the

desired drive mode according to the driving con-

ditions.

5-24 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD Shift

Switch Position Wheels Driven Indicator Light Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure

4WD shift Transfer 4LO position

2WD

Rear wheels For driving on dry, paved roads

(Economy drive) or state dynamom-

eter I/M testing

Move the 4WD switch.

2WD <—> 4H

4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift

position engaged.

IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO SHIFT THE TRANSMIS-

SION SELECTOR LEVER TO THE N POSITION IN

THIS OPERATION. PERFORM THIS OPERATION

WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.

4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandy or

snow-covered roads

Neutral

May blink

Neutral disengages the automatic

transmission mechanical parking

lock, which will allow the vehicle to

roll. Do not leave the transfer shift

position in Neutral.*2

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission selector to the (N) posi-

tion with the brake pedal depressed.

3. Depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO

or 4H with the brake pedal depressed.

THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BE-

TWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS

YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE, DE-

PRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE

TRANSMISSION SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL. *3

4LO 4 wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximum power and

traction is required (for example: on

steep grades or rocky, sandy,

muddy roads)

*1: Before moving the transmission selector shift lever from neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift

procedure is completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the

transfer gear may grind, not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position.

- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.

1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch 9OFF9.

2. Start the engine.

- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD light illuminates, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the transmission selector lever to Neutral position.

4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to desired mode.

- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the transmission selector lever from Neutral position.

*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator

lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light (if so equipped) will

also turn on when 4LO is selected. See “Vehicle dynamic control system” later in this section.

Starting and driving 5-25

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to

select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the

driving conditions. There are three types of drive

modes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the

transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to

move between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle

MUST be stationary, shift the transmission

selector to Neutral (N), and depress the

brake pedal. The switch must be depressed

and turned when changing into or out of

4LO.

WARNING

●When parking, apply the parking brake

before stopping the engine and make

sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is

on and the ATP warning light goes off.

Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpect-

edly move even if the automatic trans-

mission is in the P position.

●The 4LO indicator light must stop blink-

ing and remain illuminated or turn off

before shifting the transmission into

gear. If the transmission selector is

shifted from the (N) position to any

other gear when the 4LO indicator light

is blinking, the vehicle may move

unexpectedly.

CAUTION

●Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-

tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

●The 4H position provides greater trac-

tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will

cause increased fuel consumption and

higher oil temperatures, and could

damage drivetrain components.

Speeds over 62.5 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H

is not recommended.

●The 4LO position provides maximum

traction. Avoid raising vehicle speed ex-

cessively, as the maximum speed is ap-

proximately 31 MPH (50 km/h).

●When driving straight, shift the 4WD

shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.

Do not move the 4WD shift switch when

making a turn or reversing.

●Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-

tween 2WD and 4H) while driving on

steep downhill grades. Use the engine

brake and low automatic transmission

gears (D1 or D2) for engine braking.

●Do not operate the 4WD shift switch

(between 2WD and 4H) with the rear

wheels spinning.

●Do not drive on dry hard surface roads

in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry

hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause

unnecessary noise and tire wear.

NISSAN recommends driving in the

2WD position under these conditions.

●The 4WD transfer case may not be

shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-

bient temperatures and the transfer

4LO position indicator light may blink

even when the 4WD shift switch is

shifted. After driving for a while you can

change the 4WD transfer case between

4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,

●Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

●Drive carefully according to the road surface

conditions.

5-26 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

When the vehicle is stuck,

●Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

●If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeat

forward and backward movement to in-

crease the movement.

●If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place

stones or wooden blocks under the tires.

Then try the recovery procedures above. Tire

chains may be effective.

CAUTION

●Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires

will sink deep into the mud, making it

difficult to free the vehicle.

●Avoid shifting gears with the engine

running at high speeds as this may

cause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operations

●Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the

2WD, AUTO (Type A only), 4H or 4LO po-

sition, depending on driving conditions.

●With the switch set to the AUTO position

(Type A only), distribution of torque to the

front and rear wheels changes automatically,

depending on road conditions encountered

[ratio; 0 : 100 (2WD) →50 : 50 (4WD)].

This results in improved driving stability.

●If the 4WD shift switch is operated

while making a turn, accelerating or

decelerating or if the key switch is

turned off while in the AUTO (Type A

only), 4H or 4LO, you may feel a jolt.

This is not abnormal.

●When the vehicle is stopped after mak-

ing a turn, you may feel a slight jolt

after the selector lever is shifted to N or

P. This occurs because the transfer

clutch is released and not because of a

malfunction.

Type A

LSD0144

Type B

LSD0145

Starting and driving 5-27

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CAUTION

●When driving straight, shift the 4WD

shift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4H

position. Do not move the 4WD shift

switch when making a turn or reversing.

●Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while

driving on steep downhill grades. Use

the engine brake and low automatic

transmission gears (D1 or D2) for en-

gine braking.

●Do not operate the 4WD shift switch

with the rear wheels spinning.

●Before placing the 4WD shift switch in

the 4H position from 2WD or AUTO,

ensure the vehicle speed is less than

62.5 MPH (100 km/h). Failure to do so

can damage the 4WD system.

●Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-

tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

●Engine idling speed is high while warm-

ing up the engine. Be especially careful

when starting or driving on slippery sur-

faces with the 4WD shift switch set in

AUTO.

4WD shift indicator light

The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the

odometer display.

The light should turn off within 1 second after

turning the ignition switch to the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-

cator light will illuminate the position selected by

the 4WD shift switch.

●The 4WD shift indicator light may blink

while shifting from one drive mode to

the other. When the shifting is com-

pleted, the 4WD shift indicator light

will come on. For all mode 4WD ve-

hicles, if the indicator light does not

come on immediately, make sure the

area around the vehicle is safe, and

drive the vehicle straight, accelerate or

decelerate or move the vehicle in re-

verse, then shift the 4WD shift switch.

●If the 4WD warning light comes on, the

4WD indicator light goes out.

CAUTION

●When the 4WD shift switch is turned to

the AUTO position at low ambient tem-

peratures, the 4WD shift indicator light

may show 4H. If this happens, all four

wheels are driven as torque distribution

is in the 4H position. Be careful as the

vehicle may become difficult to turn.

When the vehicle is driven, the 4WD

shift indicator light should change to

AUTO.

●If the 4WD shift indicator light indica-

tion changes to 2WD when the 4WD

shift switch is shifted to the AUTO or 4H

position at low ambient temperatures,

the 2WD mode may be being engaged

due to malfunctioning drive system. If

the indicator does not return to normal

and the 4WD warning light comes on,

have the system checked by the nearest

NISSAN dealer.

LSD0147

5-28 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

4WD warning light

Warning light Comes on or blinks

when:

Comes on There is a malfunc-

tion in the 4–wheel

drive system

Blinks rapidly

The transfer case

oil temperature is

abnormally high (all

mode 4WD ve-

hicles)

Blinks slowly The difference in

wheel rotation is

large

The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.

The 4WD warning light comes on when the key

switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the

engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system

when the key switch is ON, the warning light will

either remain illuminated or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD

shift indicator light goes out.

For all mode 4WD vehicles, high-temperature

transfer case oil makes the warning light blink

rapidly (about twice per second). If the warning

light blinks rapidly during operation, stop the ve-

hicle in a safe place immediately. Then if the light

goes off after a while, you can continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters of front

and rear wheels will make the warning light blink

slowly (about once per two seconds). Change

the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive

fast.

CAUTION

●If the warning light comes on or blinks

slowly during operation or rapidly after

stopping the vehicle for a while, have

your vehicle checked by a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible.

●Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not

recommended when the 4WD warning

light turns on.

●When the warning light comes on, the

2WD mode may be engaged even if the

4WD shift switch is in AUTO or 4H. Be

especially careful when driving. If corre-

sponding parts are malfunctioning, the

4WD mode will not be engaged even if

the 4WD shift switch is shifted.

●Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO

position on dry hard surface roads. Driv-

ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO

may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear

and increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on when

you are driving on dry hard surface

roads:

– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the

4WD shift switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for all mode 4WD

vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift

the transmission selector to the N

position and shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for part time 4WD

vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift

the transmission selector to the N

position with the brake pedal de-

pressed and shift the 4WD shift

switch to 2WD.

●If the warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

●The transfer case may be damaged if

you continue driving with the warning

light blinking rapidly.

Starting and driving 5-29

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WARNING

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

●Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park). Fail-

ure to do so could cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly or roll away and re-

sult in an accident. Make sure the shift

lever has been pushed as far forward as

it can go and cannot be moved without

depressing the foot brake pedal.

●Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good

practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

●HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: s

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the

vehicle forward until the curb side wheel

gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: s

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB: s

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road

so the vehicle will move away from the cen-

ter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position

and remove the key.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-30 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic

pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you

will still have control of the vehicle. However,

much greater steering effort is needed, especially

in sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned off

while driving, the power assist for the

steering will not work. Steering will be

harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be

required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-

tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the

brakes and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

●While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-

erating could cause the wheels to skid

and result in an accident.

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the brakes will not work. Braking will be

harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to

heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return

to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high

speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the

stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened

or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or

drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the

best brake performance.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-31

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

This procedure is described in the vehicle service

manual and can be performed by a NISSAN

dealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

(ABS)

WARNING

●The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a

sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-

vent accidents resulting from careless

or dangerous driving techniques. It can

help maintain vehicle control during

braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-

ber that stopping distances on slippery

surfaces will be longer than on normal

surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-

tances may also be longer on rough,

gravel or snow covered roads, or if you

are using tire chains. Always maintain a

safe distance from the vehicle in front

of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-

sible for safety.

●Tire type and condition may also affect

braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and type

as specified on the Tire and Loading

Information label. See “Tire and

Loading Information label” in the

“Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see

“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the

brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard

braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.

The system detects the rotation speed at each

wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-

vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By

preventing each wheel from locking, the system

helps the driver maintain steering control and

helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-

pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-

press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,

but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-

ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above3-6MPH(5

- 10 km/h).

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the system electronically

controls the pressure applied to each brake.

This action is similar to pumping the brakes very

quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or

feel a vibration from the actuator when it is oper-

ating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is

operating properly. However, the pulsation may

indicate that road conditions are hazardous and

extra care is required while driving.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that

tests the system each time you start the engine

and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or

reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear

a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

5-32 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a

malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-

tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the

ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The

brake system then operates normally, but without

anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the

self-test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When accelerating or driving on slippery sur-

faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detect

these movements and control the braking and

engine output to help improve vehicle stability.

●When the vehicle dynamic control (VDC)

system is operating, the SLIP indicator in

the instrument panel blinks.

●If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LO

the indicator light will come on and

the VDC system will be turned off. See

“Transfer case shifting procedures” earlier in

this section.

●If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road condi-

tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your

speed and driving to these conditions. See

“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle dynamic

control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In-

struments and controls” section.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the trac-

tion control system may be disabled and the

SLIP and indicator lights will not turn off

after 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned

to the ON position.

Perform the following procedure to reset the

system:

●Start the engine and set the steering wheel

in the straight forward position.

●Drive the vehicle at speeds above 10 mph

(15 km/h) for at least 10 minutes.

●The VDC OFF indicator light should go off

indicating the traction control system is op-

erational.

●If you interrupt the reset procedure by turn-

ing the ignition off, you will need to restart

the reset procedure.

If after driving the vehicle for more than 10 min-

utes and the SLIP and lights remain illumi-

nated in the instrument panel, have the vehicle

dynamic control system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

If the vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynamic

control system off using the VDC OFF switch,

most VDC functions will be turned off. The VDC

system will still try to transfer power from a slip-

ping drive wheel to one with more traction when

the VDC system switch is OFF. The SLIP indica-

tor will flash if wheel spin is detected. The ABS

will still operate with the VDC system off.

When the VDC system is operating, you may feel

a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or

vibration from under the hood. This is normal and

indicates that the VDC system is working prop-

erly.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-33

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the

engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse

at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you

may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in

the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an

indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

●The vehicle dynamic control system is

designed to help improve driving stabil-

ity but does not prevent accidents due

to abrupt steering operation at high

speeds or by careless or dangerous

driving techniques. Reduce vehicle

speed and be especially careful when

driving and cornering on slippery sur-

faces and always drive carefully.

●If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-

dard equipment or are extremely dete-

riorated, the vehicle dynamic control

system may not operate properly and

the vehicle dynamic control off indica-

tor light may come on.

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars

and bushings are not NISSAN approved

for your vehicle or are extremely dete-

riorated the vehicle dynamic control

system may not operate properly. This

could adversely affect vehicle handling

performance, and the VDC OFF indica-

tor light may come on.

●When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners,

the vehicle dynamic control system may

not operate properly and the VDC OFF

indicator light may come on. Do not

drive on these types of roads.

●When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the vehicle dynamic control off

indicator light may illuminate. This is

not a malfunction. Restart the engine

after driving onto a stable surface.

●If wheels or tires other than the recom-

mended ones are used, the vehicle dy-

namic control system may not operate

properly and the vehicle dynamic con-

trol off indicator light may come on.

●The vehicle dynamic control system is

not a substitute for winter tires or tire

chains on a snow covered road.

WARNING

●Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehicle speed

when driving on steep down hill grades.

Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the hill descent control sys-

tem and decelerate the vehicle speed

by depressing the brake pedal if neces-

sary. Be especially careful when driving

on frozen, muddy or an extremely steep

downhill roads. Failure to control ve-

hicle speed may result in a loss of con-

trol of the vehicle and possible serious

injury or death.

●

The hill descent control may not control

the vehicle speed on a hill under all load

or road conditions. Always be prepared

to depress the brake pedal to control

vehicle speed. Failure to do so may result

in a collision or serious personal injury.

The hill descent control system helps maintain

vehicle speed when driving under 15-21 mph

(25-35 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. Hill

descent control is useful when engine braking

alone in 4H or 4L cannot control vehicle speed.

Hill descent control applies the vehicle brakes to

control vehicle speed allowing the driver to con-

centrate on steering while reducing the burden of

brake and accelerator operation.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

5-34 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●When additional braking is required on

steep downhill roads activate the hill de-

scent control system by pushing the switch

ON, see “Hill descent control switch” in the

“Instruments and controls” section.

●Once the system is activated the indicator

light will remain on in the instrument panel,

see “Hill descent control system on indicator

light” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed

while the hill descent control system is on, the

system will stop operating temporarily. As soon

as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the

hill descent control system begins to function

again if the hill descent control operating condi-

tions are fulfilled.

For the best results, when descending steep

downhill grades, the hill descent control switch

should be ON and the selector lever in 2 (Second

gear) or 1 (Low gear) for engine braking.

WARNING

●Never rely solely on the hill start assist

system to prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing backward on a hill. Always drive

carefully and attentively. Depress the

brake pedal when the vehicle is

stopped on a steep hill. Be especially

careful when stopped on a hill on frozen

or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards may re-

sult in a loss of control of the vehicle

and possible serious injury or death.

●The hill start assist system is not de-

signed to hold the vehicle at a standstill

on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when

the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.

Failure to do so may cause the vehicle

to roll backwards and may result in a

collision or serious personal injury.

●The hill start assist may not prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill

under all load or road conditions. Al-

ways be prepared to depress the brake

pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards. Failure to do so may result

in a collision or serious personal injury.

The hill start assist system automatically keeps

the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle

from rolling backwards in the time it takes the

driver to release the brake pedal and apply the

accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.

Hill start assist will operate automatically under

the following conditions:

●The selector lever is shifted to a forward or

reverse gear.

●The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill

by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2

seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hill

start assist will stop operating completely.

Hill start assist will not operate when the selector

lever is shifted to N or P or on a flat and level road.

HILL START ASSIST (HSA) SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-35

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-

icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes

frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key

hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so

equipped).

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-

perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the

anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.

For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely

cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may

freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-

mum efficiency, the battery should be checked

regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-

freeze, drain the cooling system, including the

engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pave-

ment. However, the performance of these

tires will be substantially reduced in snowy

and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-

hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-

mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL

SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please

consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,

size, speed rating and availability informa-

tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit their

use. Check local, state and provincial laws

before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see

“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

●A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

●A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

●A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

●Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-

voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

●Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” under

these conditions. Try to avoid driving on

wet ice until the road is salted or

sanded.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-36 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Whatever the condition, drive with cau-

tion. Accelerate and slow down with

care. If accelerating or downshifting too

fast, the drive wheels will lose even

more traction.

●Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

●Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

●Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of

ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-

ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,

and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

●Do not use the cruise control on slip-

pery roads.

●Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

WARNING

●Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system

or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-

riously injured by an electrical shock if

you use an ungrounded connection.

●Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

●Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-

tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug

the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded

110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the

proper extension cord or a grounded

outlet can result in a fire or electrical

shock and cause serious personal

injury.

Engine block heaters are available through

NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature

starting. The engine block heater should be used

when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or

lower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block

heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension

cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-

volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in

for at least2-4hours, depending on outside

temperatures, to properly warm the engine

coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the

engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-

erly store the cord to keep it away from

moving parts.

Starting and driving 5-37

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

5-38 Starting and driving

MEMO

6 In case of emergency

First aid kit........................................6-2

Flat tire ...........................................6-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........6-2

Changing a flat tire .............................6-3

Jump starting .....................................6-8

Push starting.....................................6-10

If your vehicle overheats ...........................6-10

Towing your vehicle ...............................6-11

Towing recommended by NISSAN ..............6-12

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle).........6-14

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

A first aid kit is located on the back door trim

panel. To remove the first aid kit:

1Squeeze the latch buttons.

2Pull the two straps apart to unfasten.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-

sure of all tires except the spare. When the low

tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated. If

equipped, the system also displays pressure of

all tires (except the spare tire) on the display

screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being

driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti-

vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure

warning light. This system will activate only when

the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). For more details, refer to

“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”

in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire

pressure information” in the “Display screen,

heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec-

tion and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section.

LCE0104

FIRST AID KIT FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WARNING

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an acci-

dent and could result in serious per-

sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for

all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, tire pressure will not be

indicated, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-

low.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Move the shift selector lever to P

(Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

●Make sure the parking brake is securely

applied and the automatic transmission

is shifted into P (Park).

●Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

●Never change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-

sional road assistance.

In case of emergency 6-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks s

1at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire

2to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is

jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

1. Jack

2. Jack tools

Getting the spare tire and tools

1. Open the back door.

2. Lift the handle on the floor and open the

storage area.

3. Remove the jack and jack tools.

4. Find the oval-shaped opening above the

middle of the bumper. Pass the T-shaped

end of the jack rod through the opening and

direct it toward the spare tire winch, located

directly above the spare tire.

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is

designed to be inserted at an angle as

shown.

WCE0044 LCE0105 LCE0106

6-4 In case of emergency

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

5. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the

square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form

a handle.

6. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into

the T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Ap-

ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in

the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod

counterclockwise to lower the spare tire.

7. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,

reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer

chain, and carefully slide the tire from under

the rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Be sure to center the spare tire suspend-

ing plate on the wheel and then lift the

spare tire.

Jacking up vehicle and removing the

damaged tire

WARNING

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

●Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the

jack provided with your vehicle on other

vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting

only your vehicle during a tire change.

●Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for jack

support.

●Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

●Never use blocks on or under the jack.

●Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true

for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

●Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

●Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off

the ground. It may cause the vehicle to

move.

Always refer to the illustration for the correct

placement and jack-up points for your specific

vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to

the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

LCE0107

In case of emergency 6-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The

jack-up points are indicated by stamped ar-

rows on the side of the frame.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground. 3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack

as shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever

and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the

tire clears the ground.

WCE0139 LCE0087

6-6 In case of emergency

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the

tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. See specific instructions under the

heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-

tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until

they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel

nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely

in the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve-

hicle completely.

WARNING

●Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

●Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts

to become loose.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-

hicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque

wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specifications at each lubrication interval.

WCE0063

In case of emergency 6-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for three hours or more or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label affixed to

the driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD

tire pressure, the display of the tire pres-

sure information may show higher pres-

sure than the COLD tire pressure after the

vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile

(1.6 km). This is because the tire pressure

increases as the tire temperature rises.

This does not indicate a system malfunc-

tion.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-

ment in the vehicle.

WARNING

●Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly se-

cured after use. Such items can become

dangerous projectiles in an accident or

sudden stop.

●The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. See specific instructions un-

der the heading “Wheels and tires” in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be fol-

lowed.

WARNING

●If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in

severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

●Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away from

the battery.

●Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-

rosive sulfuric acid solution which can

cause severe burns. If the fluid should

come into contact with anything, imme-

diately flush the contacted area with

water.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●The booster battery must be rated at 12

volts. Use of an improperly rated battery

can damage your vehicle.

JUMP STARTING

6-8 In case of emergency

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Whenever working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protectors (for

example, goggles or industrial safety

spectacles) and remove rings, metal

bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean

over the battery when jump starting.

●Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause se-

rious injury.

●Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage to

the charging system and cause personal

injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their bat-

teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever

to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P

(Park) (automatic transmission). Switch off

all unnecessary electrical systems (lights,

heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with an old

cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-

lustrated (s

A,s

B,s

C,s

D).

WCE0054

In case of emergency 6-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CAUTION

●Always connect positive (1) to positive

(1) and negative (2) to body ground (for

example, strut mounting bolt, engine

lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

●Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine com-

partment and that the cable clamps do

not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and

let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-

hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-

gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for

more than 10 seconds. If the engine does

not start right away, turn the key off and

wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be

sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover

the vent holes as it may be contaminated

with corrosive acid.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission models cannot

be push-started or tow-started. Attempt-

ing to do so may cause transmission

damage.

WARNING

●Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause engine

damage or a vehicle fire.

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap while the engine is still

hot. When the radiator or coolant reser-

voir cap is removed, pressurized hot

water will spurt out, possibly causing

serious injury.

●Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading and

the illumination of the engine oil pressure/engine

coolant temperature high indicator light), or if you

feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal

noise, etc. take the following steps.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply

the parking brake and move the shift lever to

P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air conditioner

temperature control to maximum hot and fan

control to high speed.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-10 In case of emergency

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-

ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not

open the hood further until no steam or

coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-

gine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is

running. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,

the water pump belt is missing or loose, or

the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-

gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or the

engine cooling fan. The engine cooling

fan can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-

ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank

with the engine running. Add coolant to the

engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.

Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN

dealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in

Canada) and local regulations for towing must be

followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-

age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-

able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-

tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws

and procedures for towing. To assure proper

towing and to prevent accidental damage to your

vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service

operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have

the service operator carefully read the following

precautions:

WARNING

●Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

●Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

●When towing, make sure that the trans-

mission, axles, steering system and

powertrain are in working condition. If

any unit is damaged, dollies must be

used.

●Always attach safety chains before

towing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

In case of emergency 6-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

For information about towing your vehicle behind

a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”

in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

Two-wheel drive models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed

with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or

place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

●Never tow automatic transmission

models with the rear wheels on the

ground or four wheels on the ground

(forward or backward), as this may

cause serious and expensive damage to

the transmission. If it is necessary to

tow the vehicle with the front wheels

raised always use towing dollies under

the rear wheels.

●When towing automatic transmission

models with the front wheels on the

ground or on towing dollies:

– Turn the ignition key to the OFF po-

sition, and secure the steering wheel

in a straight-ahead position with a

rope or similar device. Never secure

the steering wheel by turning the ig-

nition key to the LOCK position. This

may damage the steering lock

mechanism.

ACE1037

6-12 In case of emergency

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

If the speed or distance must necessarily be

greater, remove the propeller shaft before towing

to prevent damage to the transmission.

Four-wheel drive models

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be

used when towing your vehicle or place the ve-

hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

●Never tow 4WD models with any of the

wheels on the ground as this may cause

serious and expensive damage to the

transfer case and transmission.

WSD0097

In case of emergency 6-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

Pulling a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-

cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the re-

covery device manufacturer’s instructions.

Attach the tow strap to the towing hook.

WARNING

●Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

●Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

CAUTION

●Tow chains or cables must be attached

only to the main structural members of

the vehicle or the towing hooks (if so

equipped). Otherwise, the vehicle body

will be damaged.

●Use the towing hook (if so equipped)

only to free a vehicle stuck in sand,

snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle

for a long distance using only the tow-

ing hook.

●The towing hook is under tremendous

force when used to free a stuck vehicle.

Never pull the hook at an angle.

●Always pull the cable straight out from

the front or rear of the vehicle.

●Pulling devices should be routed so

they do not touch any part of the sus-

pension, steering, brake or cooling

systems.

●Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas

straps are not recommended for use in

vehicle towing or recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System

(if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear

an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

●Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)

and D (Drive).

●Apply the accelerator as little as possible

to maintain the rocking motion.

●Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R and D.

●Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55

km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing service

to remove the vehicle.

LCE0103

6-14 In case of emergency

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ..................................7-2

Washing ......................................7-2

Waxing........................................7-2

Removing spots ................................7-3

Underbody ....................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels ..........................7-3

Chrome parts ..................................7-3

Tire dressings..................................7-3

Cleaning interior...................................7-4

Floor mats .....................................7-4

Seat belts .....................................7-5

Corrosion protection...............................7-5

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion ......................................7-5

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion ......................................7-5

To protect your vehicle from corrosion ............7-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-

hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

●after a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain.

●after driving on coastal roads.

●when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-

pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get

on the paint surface.

●when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of

water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild

soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose

dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm

(never hot) water.

CAUTION

●Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, espe-

cially brushless ones, use some acid for

cleaning. The acid may react with some

plastic vehicle components, causing

them to crack. This could affect their

appearance, and also could cause them

not to function properly. Always check

with your car wash to confirm that acid

is not used.

●Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical deter-

gents, gasoline or solvents.

●Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as

the surface may become water-spotted.

●Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean

water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to

avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is

recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the

proper product.

●Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-

ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the

wax.

●Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing

on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,

and tree sap as quickly as possible from the

surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or

staining. Special cleaning products are available

at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory

store.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is

necessary to clean the underbody regularly in

order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and

causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-

derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-

riod and again in the spring, the underseal must

be checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film

from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to

become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,

do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive

cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant

cleaners. They could damage the electri-

cal conductors, radio antenna elements or

rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-

ened in a mild soap solution, especially during

winter months in areas where road salt is used. If

not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

●Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

●Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as am-

bient temperature.

●Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after the

cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to

the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-

ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may

react with the coating and form a compound. This

compound may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

●Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-

ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an

oil-based tire dressing.

●Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to

remove).

●Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-

pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

●Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and

leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-

ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a

dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-

facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-

tectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

●Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-

lar material.

●Small dirt particles can be abrasive and

damaging to leather surfaces and

should be removed promptly. Do not

use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,

oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents or ammonia-based cleaners as

they may damage the leather’s natural

finish.

●Never use fabric protectors unless rec-

ommended by the manufacturer.

●Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-

age the lens cover.

FLOOR MATS

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-

tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. No matter what

mats are used, be sure they are fitted for

your vehicle and are properly positioned in

the footwell to prevent interference with

pedal operation. Mats should be maintained

with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-

come excessively worn. Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s side

only)

This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to

act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor

mats have been specially designed for your ve-

hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has a

grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat

by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the

floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in

the footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats are

properly positioned.

WAI0006

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade

before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”

in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the

retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,

since these materials may severely

weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

●The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas.

●Damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-

hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.

Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside

the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to

avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing and where

atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is

used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-

sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-

ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-

erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE

FROM CORROSION

●Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

●Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

●Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

●Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CAUTION

●NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compartment

by washing it out with a hose. Remove

dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

●Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,

brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-

sion, which may be required in some areas, con-

sult a NISSAN dealer.

7-6 Appearance and care

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements..........................8-2

General maintenance ..............................8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items .........8-2

Maintenance precautions...........................8-5

Engine compartment check locations ................8-6

Engine cooling system .............................8-8

Checking engine coolant level ...................8-8

Changing engine coolant........................8-9

Engine oil.........................................8-9

Checking engine oil level ........................8-9

Changing engine oil ...........................8-10

Changing engine oil filter .......................8-11

5-speed automatic transmission fluid ...............8-12

Power steering fluid...............................8-13

Brake fluid .......................................8-13

Brake fluid ....................................8-13

Window washer fluid .............................8-14

Window washer fluid reservoir ..................8-14

Battery ..........................................8-15

Jump starting .................................8-16

Variable Voltage Control System ...................8-16

Drive belt ........................................8-17

Spark plugs......................................8-18

Replacing spark plugs .........................8-18

Air cleaner .......................................8-19

In-cabin microfilter.............................8-19

Windshield wiper blades ..........................8-20

Cleaning .....................................8-20

Replacing ....................................8-21

Brakes ..........................................8-23

Fuses ...........................................8-23

Engine compartment...........................8-24

Passenger compartment .......................8-25

Battery replacement ..............................8-26

Keyfob .......................................8-26

Intelligent Key battery ..........................8-28

Lights ...........................................8-29

Headlights....................................8-29

Exterior and interior lights.......................8-30

Wheels and tires .................................8-33

Tire pressure..................................8-33

Tire labeling...................................8-37

Types of tires..................................8-39

Tire chains....................................8-40

Changing wheels and tires .....................8-40

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have

minimum maintenance requirements with long

service intervals to save you both time and

money. However, some day-to-day and regular

maintenance is essential to maintain your NIS-

SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as its

emission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

the scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives proper

maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-

nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optional

scheduled maintenance items are described and

listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide.” You must refer to that guide to ensure

that necessary maintenance is performed on your

NISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items which

should be checked during normal day-to-day op-

eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-

eration. It is your responsibility to perform these

maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requires

minimal mechanical skill and only a few general

automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,

a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN

dealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

who are kept up-to-date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips, and in-dealership training programs. They

are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-

hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather

than after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s

service department performs the best job to meet

the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —

in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you

should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that

repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-

tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doors

and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure

that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,

latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the

hood from opening when the primary latch is

released.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

When driving in areas using road salt or other

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires,

make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check

for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every

7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-

sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the

spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully

for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components Replace the grom-

met seal, valve core and cap of the transmitter in

vehicles equipped with TPMS at every tire re-

placement or when reaching the wear limit of the

tires.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle

should pull to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or

abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at

normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

●For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet .

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-

aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair

facility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or

wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when per-

forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-

hicle, etc.

Additional information on the following

items with an “*” is found later in this sec-

tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth

operation and make sure the pedal does not bind

or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away

from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) position

mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your

vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in

the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-

tion and keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake Confirm that your vehicle is held

securely on a fairly steep hill with only the parking

brake applied.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seat

adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they

operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in

every position. Check that the head restraints

move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so

equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt web-

bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-

ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard

steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly and that

the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in

sufficient quantity when operating the heater or

air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It

should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-

hicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

Brake fluid levels* Make sure that the brake

fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on

the reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts

are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parking

the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.

Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain

back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust

system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the

carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,

water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,

check for the cause and have it corrected imme-

diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Check

the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine

off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,

cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose

connections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances from the

underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor

pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the

end of winter, the underbody should be thor-

oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas

where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See

the “Appearance and care” section of this

manual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is

adequate fluid in the reservoir.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

When performing any inspection or maintenance

work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent

serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to

the vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

●Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the vehicle

from moving. Move the shift selector

lever to P (Park).

●Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position when performing any

parts replacement or repairs.

●Never leave the engine or automatic

transmission related component har-

nesses disconnected while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

●Never connect or disconnect the battery

or any transistorized component while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

●

Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come on

at any time without warning, even if the

ignition key is in the OFF position and the

engine is not running. To avoid injury,

always disconnect the negative battery

cable before working near the fan.

●If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans, belts

and any other moving parts.

●It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jewelry,

such as rings, watches, etc. before

working on your vehicle.

●Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

●If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, support

it with safety stands.

●Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

●On gasoline engine models, the fuel

filter or fuel lines should be serviced by

a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines

are under high pressure even when the

engine is off.

CAUTION

●Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

●Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

gives instructions regarding only those items

which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-

able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-

der information” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper

servicing may result in operating difficulties or

excessive emissions, and could affect warranty

coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,

have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

VQ40DE engine

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

2. Fuse/fusible link box

3. Fuse and relay box

4. Engine oil filler cap

5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8. Drive belt location

9. Radiator cap

10. Power steering fluid reservoir

11. Battery

12. Engine coolant reservoir

WDI0633

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

VK56DE engine

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

2. Fuse/fusible link box

3. Engine oil dipstick

4. Engine oil filler cap

5. Brake fluid reservoir

6. Air cleaner

7. Drive belt location

8. Radiator cap

9. Power steering fluid reservoir

10. Fuse and relay box

11. Battery

12. Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0627

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-

freeze and coolant protection.The anti-freeze so-

lution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Ad-

ditional engine cooling system additives are not

necessary.

WARNING

●Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. See precautions in “If your

vehicle overheats” found in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual.

●The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, use only a genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure

to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent

with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-

freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled

water. The use of other types of coolant

solutions or coolant colors, such as or-

ange, may damage the engine cooling

system.

Outside temperature

down to

Genuine

NISSAN

Long Life

Antifreeze/

Coolant or

equivalent

Demineral-

ized or dis-

tilled water

°C °F

-35 -30 50% 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below

the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the

reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the

radiator when the engine is cold. If there is

insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator

with coolant up to the filler opening and also add

it to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur-

ized tank. When installing the cap, tighten

it until a clicking sound is heard.

LDI0436

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.

The service procedure can be found in the

NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheat-

ing.

WARNING

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the en-

gine is hot.

●Never remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. Serious burns could be

caused by high pressure fluid escaping

from the radiator.

●Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

●Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10

minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-

insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be between the H (High) and

L (Low) marks s

B. This is the normal oper-

ating oil level range. If the oil level is below

the L (Low) mark s

A, remove the oil filler cap

and pour recommended oil through the

opening. Do not overfill s

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the severity

of operating conditions.

VQ40DE engine

LDI0437

VK56DE engine

LDI0628

ENGINE OIL

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-

erating the engine with an insufficient

amount of oil can damage the engine, and

such damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler s

Acap by turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug

5. Remove the drain plug s

Bwith a wrench by

turning it counterclockwise and completely

drain the oil.

LDI0371 VQ40DE engine

WDI0500

VK56DE engine

WDI0504

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and

replace it at this time. See “Changing engine

oil filter” later in this section.

WARNING

●Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

●Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

●Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

●Waste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

●Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new

washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with

a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through

the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler

cap securely.

See “Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual for

drain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the

oil temperature and drain time. Use these

specifications for reference only. Always use

the dipstick to determine when the proper

amount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around

the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-

quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.

Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter.

4. Unscrew the plate covering the oil filter ex-

posing the filter.

5. Loosen the oil filter s

Awith an oil filter

wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then

remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

VQ40DE

WDI0502

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with

a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old gasket material

remaining on the sealing surface of the en-

gine.

7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

engine oil.

8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance

is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

9. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if

necessary.

When checking or replacement is required, we

recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

●Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF.

Do not mix with other fluids.

●Using automatic transmission fluid

other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF

will cause deterioration in driveability

and automatic transmission durability,

and may damage the automatic trans-

mission, which is not covered by the

NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is also

described on caution labels located in the engine

compartment.

VK56DE

WDI0505

5-SPEED AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION FLUID

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT

MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir

at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -

80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the

power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-

tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine

NISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill through

the opening.

CAUTION

●DO NOT OVERFILL.

●Recommended fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For further brake fluid specification information,

refer to “Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

WARNING

●Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake system.

The use of improper fluids can damage

the brake system and affect the vehi-

cle’s stopping ability.

●Be sure to clean the filler cap before

removing.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is

spilled, immediately wash the surface

with water.

BRAKE FLUID

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the

fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake

warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN

Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT

3fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added

frequently, the system should be checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

WDI0256 VQ40DE

LDI0440

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.

Add window washer fluid when the low window

washer fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the

cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window

washer fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better

cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield

washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving

conditions require an increased amount of win-

dow washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-

shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-

freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

●Do not substitute engine anti-freeze

coolant for window washer solution.

This may result in damage to the paint.

●Do not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at

full strength. Some methyl alcohol

based washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if spilled

while filling the window washer reser-

voir tank.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir

tank to mix the washer fluid concen-

trate and water.

VK56DE

LDI0374 LDI0441

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking

soda and water.

●Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

●If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery

terminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

●Do not expose the battery to flames or

electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-

ated by the battery is explosive. Do not

allow battery fluid to contact your skin,

eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. After

touching a battery or battery cap, do not

touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly

wash your hands. If the acid contacts

your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 minutes

and seek medical attention.

●Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in

the battery is low. Low battery fluid can

cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce bat-

tery life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

●When working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protection and

remove all jewelry.

●Battery posts, terminals and related ac-

cessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds. Wash hands after handling.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriver

as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery

case.

WDI0224

BATTERY

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level up to the bottom of

the filler opening. Do not overfill.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”

in the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual. If the engine does not start by jump

starting, the battery may have to be replaced.

Contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

●Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will by-

pass the variable voltage control sys-

tem and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely.

●Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

LDI0302

LDI0454

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage

control system. This system measures the

amount of electrical discharge from the battery

and controls voltage generated by the generator.

If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle

ground it to the body ground s

Alocated near the

battery along the negative battery cable.

1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Cooling fan

3. Air conditioner

4. Crankshaft

5. Generator

1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Crankshaft

3. Generator

4. Air conditioner

5. Water pump

6. Cooling fan

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or

LOCK position before servicing drive belt.

The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

VQ40DE

LDI0449

VK56DE

LDI0399

DRIVE BELT

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual

wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is

in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced

or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-

tion and tension in accordance with the

maintenance schedule found in the

“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped s

spark plugs as frequently as conventional type

spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-

low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service

iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-

ping.

●Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are

off and that the parking brake is engaged

securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket

can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSAN

dealer for assistance.

SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and

reused. Replace it according to the maintenance

log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-

nance Guide.”When replacing the filter, wipe the

inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the

cover with a damp cloth.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

1Loosen the screw.

2Disconnect the electrical connector.

3Unlatch the clips and remove the air cleaner

cover. Remove the air cleaner filter.

WARNING

●Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or oth-

ers to be burned. The air cleaner not

only cleans the air, it stops the flame if

the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and

the engine backfires, you could be

burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed, and be careful when working

on the engine with the air cleaner

removed.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body or

attempt to start the engine with the air

cleaner removed. Doing so could result

in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-

borne dust and pollen particles and reduces

some objectionable outside odors. The filter is

located behind the glove box. Refer to the

“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for

change intervals.

To replace the filter, perform the following proce-

dure:

1. Open the glove box and press in on the

sides so that it will open completely allowing

it to hang by the cord.

LDI0376 LDI0442

AIR CLEANER

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

2. Remove the filter cover bolt and remove the

filter cover. NOTE:

The filters are marked with air flow arrows.

The end of the filter with the arrow should

face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows

should face downward.

3. Insert the first filter into the housing and slide

it over to the right. Insert the second filter

into the housing.

4. Replace the filter cover.

5. Install the glove box door.

6. Fill out the date information on the small

replacement label and attach it to the glove

box lid.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer

solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is

clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear

water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked

in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then

rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-

shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades

and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-

age the windshield and impair driver

vision.

LDI0387 LDI0404

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2Push the release tab, then move the wiper

blade down the wiper arm to remove.

3Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the

groove.

CAUTION

●After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when the

hood is opened.

●Make sure the wiper blades contact the

glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-

aged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not

to let wax get into the washer nozzle s

A. This may

cause clogging or improper windshield washer

operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it

with a needle or small pin s

WDI0408 WDI0595

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Rear window wiper blade

1Lift the wiper arm away from the rear win-

dow.

2Push the wiper blade in and pivot until the

blade becomes free.

3Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm and

snap into place.

WDI0292

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the

brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust

every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system

check if the brake pedal height does not

return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible

wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-

placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-

ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in

motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the

brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-

sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to

moderate stops is normal and does not affect the

function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For more information regarding

brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-

nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-

vice and Maintenance Guide”.

Two types of fuses are used. Type A is used in the

fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type B is

used in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They

are stored in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-

partment and passenger compartment fuse

boxes.

LDI0455

BRAKES FUSES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,

the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse

pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not

affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the

fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-

hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the

underhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the

tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The

fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse

block in the passenger compartment.

LDI0457 LDI0444

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

5. If the fuse is open s

A, replace it with a new

fuse s

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not operate and

fuses are in good condition, check the fusible

links. If any of these fusible links are melted,

replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open s

A, replace it with an

equivalent good fuse s

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

WDI0452 LDI0445 Type A

WDI0452

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

KEYFOB

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

1Open the lid using a coin s

2Remove the battery s

3Install a new battery s

Cwith the “+” facing

down.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

4Close the lid securely.

Type B

LDI0456

LDI0484

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

5. Press the button, then the

button two or three times to check the key-

fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform step 5.

●An improperly disposed battery can

hurt the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

●The keyfob is water-resistant; how-

ever, if it does get wet, immediately

wipe completely dry.

●The operational range of the keyfob

extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)

from the vehicle. This range may vary

with conditions.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation of the device.

SDI1867

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-

lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-

gent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver s

Ainto the slit s

of the corner and twist it to separate the

upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to

protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-

lent.

●Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-

tric terminals as doing so could cause a

malfunction.

●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points will

seriously deplete the storage capacity.

●Make sure that the + side faces the bot-

tom of the case.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated s

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for

replacement.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation of the device.

WDI0535

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

HEADLIGHTS

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which

uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A

bulb can be replaced from inside the engine

compartment without removing the headlight as-

sembly.

CAUTION

●High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is scratched

or the bulb is dropped.

●When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

●DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE

HANDS.

●Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed:

Wattage 65/55Bulb No. HB5/9007*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart-

ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latest

parts information.

●Do not leave the bulb out of the head-

light reflector for a long period of time

as dust, moisture and smoke may enter

the headlight body and affect the per-

formance of the headlight.

●Aiming is not necessary after replacing

the bulb. When aiming adjustment is

necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the

exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A

temperature difference between the inside and

the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not

a malfunction. If large drops of water collect

inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Removing the headlight bulb

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the

rear end of the bulb.

LDI0446

LIGHTS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

4. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclock-

wise until it is free form the headlight reflec-

tor and then remove it s

5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb. Do not

shake or rotate the bulb when removing it

Replacing the headlight bulb

1. Insert the bulb.

DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE

HANDS.

2. Install and tighten the bulb retainer.

●Be sure the lip of the bulb socket con-

tacts the headlight body.

3. Push the electrical connector into the bulb

plastic base until it snaps and stops.

4. Connect the negative (-) battery cable.

5. Close the hood.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight 65/55 9007 (HB5)

Turn signal light/Parking light 28/8 3457AK*

Side marker 3.8 194

Rear combination light

Turn signal 27 3156AK

Stop/Tail 27/8 3157K

Back-up 18 921

License plate light*

5 2J6

Fog light*

55 H11

Personal lights*

8 AL38

Map lights 8 AL38

Cargo light 8 AL89

High-mounted stop light*

——

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

The bulb is not serviceable in-vehicle. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

1. Map lights

2. Personal lights

3. Cargo light

4. High-mount stoplight

5. License plate light

6. Rear combination light

7. Headlight assembly

8. Fog light

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When

replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.

: Indicates bulb removal

: Indicates bulb installation

LDI0450 WDI0295

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Use a cloth s

1to protect the housing.

Map lights LDI0459

Cargo light

WDI0206

Rear combination light LDI0448

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

If you have a flat tire, see the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except

the spare. When the low tire pressure

warning light is lit, one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated. If

equipped, the system also displays pres-

sure of all tires (except the spare tire) on

the display screen by sending a signal

from a sensor that is installed in each

wheel.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-

tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-

sure warning light”in the “Instruments and

controls” section, “Tire pressure informa-

tion” in the “Display screen, heater, air

conditioner and audio systems” section,

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the

spare) often and always prior to long dis-

tance trips. The recommended tire pres-

sure specifications are shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label

or the Tire and Loading Information label

(if so equipped) under the “Recom-

mended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure”

heading. This label is affixed to the driver

side center pillar. Tire pressures should

be checked regularly because:

●Most tires naturally lose air over time.

●Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objects

or if the vehicle strikes a curb while

parking.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate

speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-

der inflation, may adversely affect

tire life and vehicle handling.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WARNING

●Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

●The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight ca-

pacity is indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label (if so

equipped). Do not load your ve-

hicle beyond this capacity. Over-

loading your vehicle may result in

reduced tire life, unsafe operat-

ing conditions due to premature

tire failure, or unfavorable han-

dling characteristics and could

also lead to a serious accident.

Loading beyond the specified ca-

pacity may also result in failure of

other vehicle components.

●Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge

to ensure that the tire pressures

are at the specified level.

●Do not drive your vehicle over 85

MPH (137 km/h) unless it is

equipped with high speed rated

tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH

(137 km/h) may result in tire fail-

ure, loss of control and possible

injury.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Tire and loading information label

1Seating capacity: The maximum num-

ber of occupants that can be seated

in the vehicle.

2Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-

mation in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section.

3Original tire size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle at

the factory.

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to

this pressure when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or more

hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6

km) at moderate speeds. The recom-

mended cold tire inflation is set by the

manufacturer to provide the best bal-

ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,

driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the

vehicle’s GVWR.

5Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later

in this section.

6Spare tire size or compact spare tire

size (if so equipped).

LDI0485

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too

hard or force the valve stem side-

ways, or air will escape. If the hissing

sound of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pressure,

reposition the gauge to eliminate this

leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare to the specifica-

tion shown on the Tire Placard (if so

equipped) or the Tire and Loading

Information label (if so equipped).

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip of

the gauge stem to release pressure.

Recheck the pressure and add or

release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla-

tion Pressure

Front Original Tire:

P245/75R16

P265/65R17

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/60R18

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Rear Original Tire:

P245/75R16

P265/65R17

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/60R18

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare Tire:

P245/75R16

P265/65R17

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/60R18

240 kPa, 35 PSI

LDI0393

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This information iden-

tifies and describes the fundamental

characteristics of the tire and also pro-

vides the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in case of a

recall.

1Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The 9P9indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles (not all

tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimeters of

the tire from sidewall edge to side-

wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The 9R9stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number

is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight

each tire can support. You may not

find this information on all tires be-

cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

Example WDI0394

Example

WDI0395

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the 9Depart-

ment Of Transportation.9The symbol

can be placed above, below or to the

left or right of Tire Identification Num-

ber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-

ture

6. Four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For ex-

ample, the numbers 3103 means the

31st week of 2003. If these numbers

are missing, then look on the other

sidewall of the tire.

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-

ers also must indicate the materials in the

tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,

and others.

4Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure

This number is the greatest amount of air

pressure that should be put in the tire. Do

not exceed the maximum permissible in-

flation pressure.

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load

in kilograms and pounds that can be car-

ried by the tire. When replacing the tires

on the vehicle, always use a tire that has

the same load rating as the factory in-

stalled tire.

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-

ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

Example

WDI0396

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has

radial structure.

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that

contains a whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on the

other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-

ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical

tire that has a particular side that must

always face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

●When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information about

tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

●Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory equipped

tires, and may not match the potential

maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed

the maximum speed rating of the tire.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-

els to provide good performance all year, includ-

ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season

tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S

on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow

traction than All Season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models

to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially re-

duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have

the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings

than factory equipped tires and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-

ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same

size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all

four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires

may be used. However, some U.S. states and

Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check

local, state and provincial laws before installing

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to

location. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure

they are the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-

signed to meet the minimum clearances between

the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or

body component required to accommodate the

use of a winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are determined

using the factory equipped tire size. Other types

may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners

when recommended by the tire chain manufac-

turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the

tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage to the

fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-

ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-

tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your

vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling

and performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with

chains in such conditions can cause damage to

the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to

some overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear

paved roads.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires

every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section in this manual for tire re-

placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

WDI0258

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times. It

is recommended that wheel nuts be

tightened to specification at each

tire rotation interval.

WARNING

●After rotating the tires, check and

adjust the tire pressure.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

●Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

●Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulg-

ing or objects caught in the tread.

If excessive wear, cracks, bulging

or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)

should be replaced.

●The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

●Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be ob-

vious. Replace the tires as neces-

sary to prevent tire failure and

possible personal injury.

●Improper service of the spare tire

may result in serious personal in-

jury. If it is necessary to repair the

spare tire, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

WDI0259

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. Recommended types and

sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

WARNING

●The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of

different brands, construction (bias,

bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns

can adversely affect the ride, braking,

handling, ground clearance, body-to-

tire clearance, tire chain clearance,

speedometer calibration, headlight aim

and bumper height. Some of these ef-

fects may lead to accidents and could

result in serious personal injury.

●If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels which

have the same off-set dimension.

Wheels of a different off-set could

cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-

hicle handling characteristics and/or

interference with the brake

discs/drums. Such interference can

lead to decreased braking efficiency

and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-

fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-

cal and consumer information” section

of this manual for wheel off-set

dimensions.

●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, tire pressure will not be

indicated, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could have

structural damage and could fail with-

out warning.

●The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or

radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Failure to do so may result in a

circumference difference between tires

on the front and rear axles which will

cause excessive tire wear and may dam-

age the transmission, transfer case and

differential gears.

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended

that all four tires be replaced with tires of the

same size, brand, construction and tread pattern.

The tire pressure and wheel alignment should

also be checked and corrected as necessary.

Contact a NISSAN dealer.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get

out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-

anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet .

Care of wheels

●Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

●Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

●Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing

the wheels.

●Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

●NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in areas

where it is used during winter.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

MEMO

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .........9-2

Fuel recommendation ...........................9-3

Engine oil and oil filter recommendations ..........9-5

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations ..............................9-6

Specifications.....................................9-7

Engine ........................................9-7

Wheels and tires ...............................9-8

Dimensions and weights ........................9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country ...................................9-9

Vehicle identification ...............................9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ..........9-9

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) ...............................9-9

Engine serial number...........................9-10

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-10

Emission control information label ...............9-11

Tire and loading information label................9-11

Air conditioner specification label................9-11

Installing front license plate ........................9-12

Vehicle loading information ........................9-12

Terms ........................................9-12

Vehicle load capacity ..........................9-13

Securing the load..............................9-15

Loading tips ..................................9-16

Measurement of weights .......................9-16

Towing a trailer ...................................9-17

Maximum load limits ...........................9-17

Towing load/specification.......................9-20

Towing safety .................................9-20

Flat towing....................................9-26

Uniform tire quality grading ........................9-26

Emission control system warranty ..................9-27

Reporting safety defects (US only) .................9-28

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test .....9-28

Event data recorders..............................9-29

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . .9-30

In the event of a collision .......................9-30

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 21-1/8 gal 17-5/8 gal 80 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91) *1

Engine oil *7

Drain and Refill

With oil filter change VQ40DE 5-3/8 qt 4-1/2 qt 5.1

• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2

• Viscosity SAE 5W-30

VK56DE 6-1/2 qt 5-1/2 qt 6.2

Without oil filter change VQ40DE 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt 4.8

VK56DE 6-1/4 qt 5-1/4 qt 5.9

Cooling system With reservoir models w/o rear a/c 2-3/4 gal 2-1/4 gal 10.2 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled water

With reservoir models with rear a/c 3-1/2 gal 3 gal 13.4

Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the

instructions in the “Maintenance and do-

it-yourself” section.

Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF *3

Power steering fluid (PSF) Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*4

Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *5 or equivalent DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *6

Air conditioning system oil — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6

Transfer fluid All mode 4WD — — — Genuine Nissan Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada

NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid *8

Part time 4WD — — —

Front final drive oil — — — Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5

Viscosity SAE 80W-90 Gear Oil, *9

Rear final drive oil — — — API GL-5 Synthetic 75W–90 Gear Oil or equivalent, *10

Windshield washer fluid (shared between

front and rear wipers) 1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid

or equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”

*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”

*3: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic

transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

*4: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON™ VI or equivalent ATF may also be used.

*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.

*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label.”

*7: For further details, see “Changing engine oil.”

*8: Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF or equivalent (if available) may also be used.

*9: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0° C (32° F).

*10: See your NISSAN dealer for service.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded pre-

mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91

AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research oc-

tane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is

not available you may use unleaded regular gaso-

line with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI

number (Research octane number 91), but you

may notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run on

E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage

the fuel system components and is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-

ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-

cations where it is available. Many of the automo-

bile manufacturers developed this specification

to improve emission control system and vehicle

performance. Ask your service station manager if

the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-

lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-

genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol

with or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of

which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-

patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-

termined. If in doubt, ask your service station

manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

●The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

●If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should con-

tain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

●If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable amount

of appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors, such methanol

blends may cause fuel system damage

and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not avail-

able to ensure that all methanol blends

are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-

hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-

ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after

using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately

change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a

low blend of MTBE.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-

eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can

cause paint damage.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can

only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government

regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common abbreviation or

the appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-

tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit

removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.

Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel

system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark

knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-

vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even

when using gasoline of the stated octane

rating, or if you hear steady spark knock

while holding a steady speed on level

roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the

condition. Failure to correct the condition

is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN

is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark

knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may

cause excessive fuel consumption or engine

damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-

countered, have your vehicle checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

CAUTION

●Your vehicle is not designed to run on

E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle

not specifically designed for E-85 fuel

can damage fuel system components

and is not covered by the NISSAN new

vehicle limited warranty.

●E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%

fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded

gasoline.

●U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbrevia-

tion or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

9-4 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality

and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory

engine life and performance. See 9Capacities

and recommended fuel/lubricants9earlier in this

section. NISSAN recommends the use of an

energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel

economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-

cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-

tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which

do not have the specified quality label should not

be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-

sary when the proper oil type is used and main-

tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been

previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

to select the engine oil viscosity based on the

temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-

ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil

viscosity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-

placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in “Change

intervals”.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters

that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding

recommended oil and filter change intervals

could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine

caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-

ranty.

WTI0183

Technical and consumer information 9-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend

upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may

require more frequent oil and filter changes:

●repeated short distance driving at cold out-

side temperatures

●driving in dusty conditions

●extensive idling

●towing a trailer

●stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN

A/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva-

lents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil will

cause severe damage to the air condition-

ing system and will require the replace-

ment of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the

earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-

tions require the recovery and recycling of any

refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-

tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained

technicians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-

ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air

conditioner system.

9-6 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

ENGINE

Model VQ40DE VK56DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60° 8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.622 (95.5 x 92) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 241.30 (3,954) 338.78 (5,552)

Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6 1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2

Idle speed

A/T (in “N” position) No adjustment is necessary.

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle

speed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug DILFR5A11 DILFR5A11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

SPECIFICATIONS

Technical and consumer information 9-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels

16 x 7.0J

17 x 7.5J

18 x 8.0J

Tires

P245/75R16

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/65R17

P265/60R18

Spare tire Full size

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 192.3 (4884)

Overall width in (mm) 72.6 (1843)

Overall height

2WD S/SE with roof

rack

in (mm) 72.4 (1838)

2WD LE with roof rack in (mm) 72.5 (1841)

V8 2WD SE/LE with

roof rack

in (mm) 72.5 (1841)

4WD S/SE with roof

rack

in (mm) 72.8 (1849)

4WD SE-OR with roof

rack

in (mm) 73.3 (1861)

4WD LE with roof rack in (mm) 72.9 (1851)

V8 4WD SE/LE with

roof rack

in (mm) 72.9 (1851)

Front Track in (mm) 61.8 (1570)

Rear Track in (mm) 61.8 (1570)

Wheelbase in (mm) 112.2 (2850)

Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label” on the center

pillar between the driver’s side

front and side doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

9-8 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first find

out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-

cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low

may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-

fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where

appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-

sion control and safety standards vary according

to the country, state, province or district; there-

fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, transpor-

tation, and registration are the responsibil-

ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible

for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is

attached as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as

shown.

LTI0085 LTI0086

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER

COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

Technical and consumer information 9-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-

bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-

able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle

Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review

it carefully.

VQ40DE engine

LTI0127

VK56DE engine

WTI0095 WTI0099

9-10 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. The label is located as

shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed to

the underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0173 WTI0100 WTI0167

Technical and consumer information 9-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Use the following steps to mount the front license

plate:

1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at the

location mark (small dimple) using a 0.37 in

(9.5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the

drill. Insert two plastic grommets provided.

Install the license plate holder using the two

bolts (and washers) provided.

2. Mount the license plate using two M6-

14mm bolts.

License plate bolt tightening torque:

3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)

WARNING

●It is extremely dangerous to ride

in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In

a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat

belts.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with

the following terms before loading your

vehicle:

●Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment, flu-

ids, emergency tools, and spare tire

assembly. This weight does not in-

clude passengers and cargo.

●GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

passengers and cargo.

●GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-

sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other optional

equipment. This information is lo-

cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

●GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle. This informa-

tion is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total weight

rating of the vehicle, passengers,

cargo, and trailer.

LTI0137

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

9-12 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the ve-

hicle. This is the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo that

can be loaded into the vehicle. If the

vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load. This

information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label (if so

equipped).

●Cargo capacity - permissible weight

of cargo, the subtracted weight of

occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

Both the GVWR and GAWR are located

on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label. See “Measurement of Weights”

later in this section.

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-

hicle shown as “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label (if so

equipped). Do not exceed the number of

occupants shown as “Seating Capacity”

on the Tire and Loading Information label

(if so equipped).

To get “the combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

occupants, then add the total luggage

weight. Examples are shown in the follow-

ing illustration.

Technical and consumer information 9-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX kg or XXX

lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg

or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the

XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb. passengers

in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)

= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

Example

LTI0152

9-14 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calculated in

Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this re-

duces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

See “Measurement of Weights” later in

this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label.

SECURING THE LOAD

There are tie down hooks located in the cargo

area as shown. The tie down hooks can be used

to secure cargo with ropes or other types of

straps.

Do not apply a total load of more than 55

lbs. (245 N) to a single s

Aplastic hook or 44

lbs. (196 N) to a single s

Bplastic hook

when securing cargo.

Do not apply a total load of more than 110

lbs. (490 N) to a single metal floor tie-down

hook when securing cargo.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●The child restraint top tether strap may

be damaged by contact with items in

the cargo area. Secure any items in the

cargo area. Your child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in a collision if

the top tether strap is damaged.

Cargo area ceiling tie-down hooks

WTI0125

Cargo area floor tie-down hooks

LTI0126

Technical and consumer information 9-15

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●Do not load your vehicle any heavier

than the GVWR or the maximum front

and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage could

occur, or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result in

loss of control and cause personal

injury.

LOADING TIPS

●The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●Do not load the front and rear axle to

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

●Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear GAWRs.

If you do, parts of your vehicle

can break, tire damage could oc-

cur, or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result

in loss of control and cause per-

sonal injury.

●Overloading not only can shorten

the life of your vehicle and the

tire, but can also cause unsafe

vehicle handling and longer brak-

ing distances. This may cause a

premature tire failure which

could result in a serious accident

and personal injury. Failures

caused by overloading are not

covered by the vehicle’s

warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of your

vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive

to a scale and weigh the front and the rear

wheels separately to determine axle

loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-

ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads

should not exceed the gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are

given on the vehicle certification label. If

weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-

move items to bring all weights below the

ratings.

9-16 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely affect

vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

●Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load

for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your

engine, axle or other parts could be

damaged.

●For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you

tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full

throttle. This helps the engine and other

parts of your vehicle wear in at the

heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-

marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember

that towing a trailer places additional loads on

your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-

ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available

on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This

guide includes information on trailer towing ca-

pability and the special equipment required for

proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the

value specified in the “Towing

Load/Specification” chart found later in this sec-

tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight

plus its cargo weight.

●When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.

(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake

system MUST be used.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating

(GCWR) should not exceed the value specified

in the following “Towing Load/Specification”

chart. The GCWR equals the combined weight of the

towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)

plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater

than these or using improper towing equipment

could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking

and performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not

only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also

the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-

priate for level highway driving may have to be

reduced for low traction situations (for example,

on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0162

TOWING A TRAILER

Technical and consumer information 9-17

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.

For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside

temperatures on graded roads can affect engine

performance and cause overheating. The engine

protection mode, which helps reduce the chance

of engine damage, could activate and automati-

cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may

decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully

to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather

and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced engine

power and vehicle speed. The reduced

speed may be lower than other traffic,

which could increase the chance of a col-

lision. Be especially careful when driving.

Pull to the side of the road to a safe area.

Allow the engine to cool and return to

normal operation. See “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from improper

towing procedures is not covered by

NISSAN warranties.

Tongue load

When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib-

uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 -

15 percent of the total trailer load within the

maximum tongue load limits shown in the follow-

ing “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If the

tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo

to allow for proper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight

(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed

the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label. The GVW equals the combined weight of

the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,

hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must

not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

WTI0160 ATI1025

9-18 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a

base vehicle with driver and any options required

to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,

cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the

trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and

reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity

and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to

confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front

GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured

using platform type scales commonly found at

truck stops, highway weigh stations, building

supply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity for

tongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of

the passengers and cargo that are normally

in the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-

able maximum tongue load.

To determine the available towing capacity, use

the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

9Towing Load/Specification9chart found

later in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-

able maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh

your trailer on a scale with all equipment and

cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is

towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not

more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown

on the trailer and is not more than the calculated

available maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to

make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear

Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front

Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight

on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to

be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-

ings.

Example:

●Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed

on a scale - including passengers, cargo and

hitch - 5,425 lb. (2460 kg).

●Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -

6,000 lb. (2721 kg).

●Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

from “Towing Load/Specification9chart -

11,133 lb. (5049 kg).

●Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-

ing Load/Specification9chart - 6,000 lb.

(2721 kg).

6,000 lb. (2721 kg) GVWR

– 5,425 lb. (2460 kg) GVW

= 575 lb. (260 kg) Available for tongue

weight

11,133 lb. (5049 kg) GCWR

– 5,425 lb. (2460 kg) GVW

= 5,708 lb. (2588 kg) Capacity available for

towing

575 lb. (260 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 5,708 lb. (2588 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less than

the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-

ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-

tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight. If the tongue

Technical and consumer information 9-19

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to

obtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the

10 - 15% tongue weight specification even if the

calculated available tongue weight is greater

than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less

than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to

match the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are within

the required ratings.

Trailer frontal area

CAUTION

Exceeding the maximum trailer frontal

area specification may exceed the towing

capacity of the vehicle. This may affect the

towing performance and lead to vehicle

damage.

The trailer frontal area affects the towing load of a

trailer. The frontal area is the total area of the

vehicle and trailer that is affected by air resis-

tance while towing. Do not exceed the maximum

trailer frontal area specification shown in the

9Towing Load/Specification” chart. The frontal

area can be determined by multiplying the width

of the trailer by the height of the trailer. For

example, a trailer that is 8 feet wide by 6 feet tall

has a trailer frontal area of 48 square feet.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

US & CAN

V6 V8

Towing

Capacity*1, *2

6,000 lb.

(2721 kg)

7,000 lb.

(3175 kg)

Tongue Load 600 lb.

(272 kg)

700 lb.

(318 kg)

Gross Com-

bined Weight

Rating

11,133 lb.

(5,049 kg)

12,570 lb.

(5,700 kg)

Maximum trailer

frontal area 60 sq ft (5.52 sq meters)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculated

assuming a base vehicle with driver and any

options required to achieve the rating. Additional

passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment

will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your

vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

*2: Requires weight distribution hitch.

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional

trailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-

cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This

hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of

this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is

used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball

that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine

Nissan ball mounts and hitch balls are available

from your NISSAN dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional

trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of

your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame

mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your

vehicle and trailer. A genuine Nissan trailer hitch

is available from your NISSAN dealer. Make sure

the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle

to help avoid personal injury or property damage

due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road

surfaces or passing trucks.

9-20 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific

weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-

pable of towing a trailer heavier than the

weight rating of the hitch components.

Never exceed the weight rating of the

hitch components. Doing so can cause

serious personal injury or property

damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight

rating for your trailer:

●The required hitch ball size is stamped on

most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also

have the size printed on the top of the ball.

●Choose the proper class hitch ball based on

the trailer weight.

●The diameter of the threaded shank of the

hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount

hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should

be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole

in the ball mount.

●The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be

long enough to be properly secured to the

ball mount. There should be at least 2

threads showing beyond the lock washer

and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and

the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.

Choose a proper class ball mount based on the

trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should

be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the

ground.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or 9dead weight9ball mount is

one that is designed to carry the whole amount of

tongue weight and gross weight directly on the

ball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling”or

“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball

mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue

weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many ve-

hicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given

trailer, and need some of the tongue weight

transferred through the frame and pushing down

on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow

vehicle.

Another reason to have a weight distributing ball

mount is to comply with the rating on your re-

ceiver. Most receivers have a weight carrying

rating of 5,000 lbs. gross weight, 500 lbs. tongue

weight and a weight distribution rating of 10,000

lbs. gross weight, 1,000 lbs. tongue weight. This

means that without using a weight distributing

ballmount, the receiver is only designed to carry

5,000 lbs.

When hooking up a trailer using a weight distrib-

uting hitch, always refer to the hitch manufactur-

er’s instructions.

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.

With the ignition on and the doors closed,

allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes

so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point on

the front and rear bumpers at the center of

the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust

the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper

height is within0-.5inches (0 – 13 mm) of

the reference height measured in step 2. The

rear bumper should be no higher than the

reference height measured in step 2.

Technical and consumer information 9-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributing

hitch so the rear of the bumper is no

higher than the measured reference

height when the trailer is attached. If the

rear bumper is higher than the measured

reference height when loaded, the vehicle

may handle unpredictably which could

cause a loss of vehicle control and cause

serious personal injury or property

damage.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting

caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-

dling. Sway control devices may be used to help

control these affects. If you choose to use one,

contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make

sure the sway control device will work with the

vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-

tem. Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the sway

control device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

Class II hitch

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,510 kg).

Class III hitch

Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,272 kg).

The genuine NISSAN step bumper is considered

a Class III ball mount.

Class IV hitch

Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 10,000 lb (4,545 kg). A

weight distributing hitch should be used to tow

trailers that weigh over 5,000 lb (2,272 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV

trailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb

(4,545 kg) maximum weight rating, but your ve-

hicle is only capable of towing the maximum

trailer weights shown in the “Towing

Load/Specification” chart earlier in this section.

CAUTION

●Special hitches which include frame re-

inforcements are required for towing

above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genu-

ine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts and

hitch balls for pickup trucks and sport

utility vehicles are available at a

NISSAN dealer.

●The hitch should not be attached to or

affect the operation of the impact-

absorbing bumper.

●Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

●Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-

tem, brake system, etc. to install a

trailer hitch.

●To reduce the possibility of additional

damage if your vehicle is struck from

the rear, where practical, remove the

receiver when not in use.

●Regularly check that all trailer hitch

mounting bolts are securely mounted.

●When towing with the hitch ball

mounted to the rear bumper, do not

make sharp turns. The trailer may con-

tact the bumper and cause damage to

the bumper or trailer.

9-22 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—arosenma

Tire pressures

●When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-

hicle tires to the recommended cold

tire pressure indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

●Trailer tire condition, size, load rating

and proper inflation pressure should

be in accordance with the trailer and

tire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between your

vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should

be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,

not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety

chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch

ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave

enough slack in the chains to permit turning

corners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical

system, a commercially available power-

type module/converter must be used to

provide power for all trailer lighting. This

unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct

power source for all trailer lights while

using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and

turn signal circuits as a signal source. The

module/converter must draw no more

that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail

lamp circuits. Using a module/converter

that exceeds these power requirements

may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-

tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-

tain the proper equipment and to have it

installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or

local regulations. For assistance in hooking up

trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-

table trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with the

trailer tow package are equipped with a 4-pin

trailer harness connector. If your trailer is

equipped with a 7-pin connector, an adapter will

be needed to connect the trailer lights to the

vehicle. Adapters are available at NISSAN deal-

ers as well as auto parts stores and hitch retail-

ers.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,

make sure it conforms to federal and/or local

regulations and that it is properly installed.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-

rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

●Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloaded

trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it

has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down

condition; check for improper tongue load,

overload, worn suspension or other possible

causes of either condition.

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Keep the cargo load as low as possible in

the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity

low.

●Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the

trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in

the back half. Also make sure the load is

balanced side to side.

Technical and consumer information 9-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—arosenma

●Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-

hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and

trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a

trailer to the vehicle.

●Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to

all federal, state or local regulations. If not,

install any mirrors required for towing before

driving the vehicle.

●Determine the overall height of the vehicle

and trailer so the required clearance is

known.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the

vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,

stopping and backing up in an area which is free

from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-

mance will be somewhat different than under

normal driving conditions.

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or

lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-

ently becoming unlatched.

●Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

●Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

●Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed.

●When backing up, hold the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand. Move your

hand in the direction in which you want the

trailer to go. Make small corrections and

back up slowly. If possible, have someone

guide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and

trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not

recommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector lever to the P

(Park) position before blocking the

wheels and applying the parking brake,

transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill

side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly

release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-

sorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the indicator light (if so

equipped) indicates the transfer case is in

4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. If

the indicator light is flashing, or the

ATP light is ON, make sure the transmission

is in P (Park) (AT) and turn the 4WD switch

to 2WD or 4H. See 9Automatic transmission

park warning light9in the 9Instruments and

controls9section and 9Using four wheel

drive9in the 9Starting and driving9section.

7. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are

clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

●When going down a hill, shift into a lower

gear and use the engine braking effect.

When going up a long grade, downshift the

transmission to a lower gear and reduce

speed to reduce chances of engine over-

loading and/or overheating. However, for

9-24 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

long steep grades, do not stay in 1st gear

when driving above 35 MPH (56 km/h) or

2nd gear when driving above 58 MPH (93

km/h).

●If the engine coolant rises to an extremely

high temperature when the air conditioner

system is on, turn off the air conditioner.

Coolant heat can be additionally vented by

opening the windows, switching the fan

control to high and setting the temperature

control to the HOT position.

●Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal

circumstances.

●Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first

500 miles (805 km).

●For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do

tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

●Have your vehicle serviced more often than

at intervals specified in the recommended

Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-

vice and Maintenance Guide”.

●When making a turn, your trailer wheels will

be closer to the inside of the turn than your

vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,

make a larger than normal turning radius

during the turn.

●Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely

affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-

ing vehicle sway. When being passed by

larger vehicles, be prepared for possible

changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-

hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to

allow the vehicle to coast and steer as

straight ahead as the road conditions allow.

This combination will help stabilize the ve-

hicle

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or

applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the

brakes and pull to the side of the road in a

safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-

anced as described earlier in this section.

●Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires con-

siderably more distance than normal pass-

ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must

also pass the other vehicle before you can

safely change lanes.

●Downshift the transmission to a lower gear

for engine braking when driving down steep

or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle

without applying the brakes.

●To maintain engine braking efficiency and

electrical charging performance, do not use

overdrive.

●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the

brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced

braking efficiency.

●Increase your following distance to allow for

greater stopping distances while towing a

trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

●Do not use cruise control while towing a

trailer.

●Some states or provinces have specific

regulations and speed limits for vehicles that

are towing trailers. Obey the local speed

limits.

●Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-

nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50

miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

●When stopped in traffic for long periods of

time in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P

(Park) position.

Technical and consumer information 9-25

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

●When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-

ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or

rear bumper.

●Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights

before backing the trailer into the water or

the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil

should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, see the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

earlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor

home.

CAUTION

●Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

●Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

●DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-

sion vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL

DAMAGE internal transmission parts

due to lack of transmission lubrication.

●For emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”

in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

Automatic Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic

transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST

be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive

wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s

recommendations when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on

the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times

as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service practices and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-

sured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

9-26 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material of the

tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-

sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-

mance which all passenger car tires must meet

under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated

and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-

ther separately or in combination, can

cause heat build-up and possible tire

failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following

emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN

vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-

placement by writing to:

●Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN

vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-

placement by writing to:

●Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

Technical and consumer information 9-27

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-

tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-

come involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-

hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go

to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh

Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-NISSAN-1.

Due to legal requirements in some states and

Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-

quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-

tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of

the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it

is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,

the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary

usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the

I/M test, check the vehicle’s

inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-

tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting

the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then

blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is

9not ready9. If the MIL does not blink after 20

seconds, the I/M test condition is 9ready.9If the

MIL indicates the vehicle is in a 9not ready9con-

dition, drive the vehicle through the following

pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If

you cannot or do not want to perform the driving

pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe and

prudent manner according to traffic con-

ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolant

temperature gauge needle points to C. Al-

low the engine to idle until the gauge needle

points between the C and H (normal oper-

ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88

km/h), then quickly release the accelerator

pedal completely and keep it released for at

least 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a

moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of

53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9

minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)

and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)

and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-

utes.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US

only) READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

9-28 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-

lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)

position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps1-8atleast one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the

preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-

able between steps. Do not stop the engine until

step 7 is completed.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-

corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-

tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-

ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR

is designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this

vehicle is designed to record such data as:

●How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

●Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

●How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

●How fast the vehicle was traveling.

●Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-

ing of the circumstances in which crashes and

injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by

your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data with

the type of personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-

ment is required and access to the vehicle or the

EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-

facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have ac-

cess to the vehicle or the EDR. The EDR data

may be retrieved during routine vehicle servicing

or for special research. It might also be accessed

with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee, in

response to a request by law enforcement, or as

otherwise required or permitted by law.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Technical and consumer information 9-29

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for your

vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations

and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-

cedures, this manual is the same one used by the

factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN

dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN

Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service

and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model

year and later contact:

Tweddle Litho Company

1-800-450-9491

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model

year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation

20770 Westwood Drive

Strongsville, OH 44149

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year

and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation

20770 Westwood Drive

Strongsville, OH 44149

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-

vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact

your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-

ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area

call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-

387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-

tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and

Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely

event, there is some important information you

should know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorize

the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to

cut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN

collision parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts

made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-

tions – if you want to help it to last and hold its

resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your

insurance agent and your repair shop to

only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.

NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,

nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage

caused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect

your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-

tection and maintain the resale value of your

vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using

Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-

necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the

end of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to

minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the

windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-

genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such

built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-

ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

9-30 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be

advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair

your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws

that restrict insurance companies from authoriz-

ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during

the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-

tect you, so you can take action to protect your-

self.

It’s your right!

If you should need further information visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).

Technical and consumer information 9-31

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

9-32 Technical and consumer information

MEMO

10 Index

4WD warning light ...............2-15

Active Head Restraint ..............1-7

Adjusting pedal position ............3-24

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system) .....................1-40

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air

bag system) .................1-47

Air bag warning labels .............1-55

Air bag warning light...........1-56, 2-17

Air cleaner housing filter ............8-19

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ..........4-39

Air conditioner service ...........4-47

Air conditioner specification label .....9-11

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations ..............9-6

Heater and air conditioner

controls ................4-36, 4-44

Rear seat air conditioner ..........4-46

Servicing air conditioner ..........4-47

Air flow charts..................4-40

Alarm system

(See vehicle security system) .........2-22

Anchor point locations .............1-24

Antenna .....................4-87

Anti-lock brake warning light..........2-13

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........5-32

Audible reminders................2-21

Audio system ..................4-47

Compact Disc (CD) changer .......4-62

Compact disc (CD) player .....4-56, 4-70

Audio System

CompactFlash (CF) player .........4-72

Audio system

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player ....................4-54

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) changer ................4-59

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) player .................4-67

Audio System

Music Box hard-disk drive audio

system ....................4-74

Audio system

Radio ....................4-47

Rear audio controls .............4-86

Audio System

Settings................4-59, 4-67

Audio system

Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-85

Autolight switch .................2-28

Automatic

Automatic drive positioner .........3-29

Automatic power window switch .....2-49

Automatic transmission position indicator

light .....................2-18

Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12

Transmission selector lever lock

release ....................5-16

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror .......3-26

AUX jack .................4-65, 4-72

Battery ......................8-15

Charge warning light ............2-14

Before starting the engine ...........5-11

Belt (See drive belt) ..............8-17

Block heater

Engine ....................5-37

BluetoothThands-free phone system . . . .4-104

Booster seats ..................1-35

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)......5-32

Brake fluid ..................8-13

Brake light (See stop light).........8-30

Brake system ................5-31

Brake warning light .............2-14

Brake wear indicators ........2-21, 8-23

Parking brake operation ..........5-17

Self-adjusting brakes ............8-23

Brakes ......................8-23

Break-in schedule................5-20

Brightness control

Instrument panel ..............2-30

Brightness/contrast button .......4-15, 4-33

Bulb check/instrument panel..........2-13

Bulb replacement ................8-30

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...................9-2

Car phone or CB radio ............4-103

Cargo light ...................2-53

Cargo net ....................2-44

Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12

CD care and cleaning .............4-83

CD changer (See audio system)........4-62

CD player (See audio system) .....4-56, 4-70

Child restraint with top tether strap ......1-24

Child restraints .......1-14, 1-15, 1-20, 1-22

Precautions on child

restraints............1-20, 1-28, 1-35

Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-24

Child safety rear door lock............3-6

Chimes, audible reminders...........2-21

Cleaning exterior and interior ..........7-2

Clock ...............4-55, 4-60, 4-68

(models with navigation system) . .4-11, 4-27

Clock set .................4-11, 4-27

C.M.V.S.S. certification label..........9-10

Cold weather driving ..............5-36

Compact disc (CD) player .......4-56, 4-70

CompactFlash (CF) player ...........4-72

Console box...................2-38

Control panel buttons

Brightness/contrast button. .4-15, 4-16, 4-33

Enter button ..............4-2, 4-16

Setting button .............4-9, 4-25

Startup screen ...............4-19

Without navigation system..........4-2

Controls

Audio controls (steering wheel) ......4-85

Heater and air conditioner

controls ................4-36, 4-44

Rear audio controls .............4-86

Rear seat air conditioner ..........4-46

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants.................9-2

Changing engine coolant ..........8-9

Checking engine coolant level........8-8

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6

Corrosion protection ...............7-5

Cruise control ..................5-18

Cup holders ...................2-40

Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . .1-52

Daytime running light system

(Canada only) ..................2-29

Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch ....................2-26

Digital video disc DVD .............4-88

Dimensions and weights .............9-8

Dimmer switch for instrument panel ......2-30

Display controls

(see control panel buttons) ........4-2, 4-16

Distance to empty .............4-5, 4-20

Door locks ....................3-4

Door open warning light ............2-15

Drive belt ....................8-17

Drive positioner, Automatic...........3-29

Driving

Cold weather driving ............5-36

Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12

Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Economy - fuel .................5-20

Emission control information label .......9-11

Emission control system warranty .......9-27

Engine

Before starting the engine .........5-11

Block heater.................5-37

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants.................9-2

Changing engine coolant ..........8-9

Changing engine oil ............8-10

Changing engine oil filter..........8-11

Checking engine coolant level........8-8

Checking engine oil level ..........8-9

Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6

Engine cooling system ............8-8

Engine oil ...................8-9

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5

Engine oil pressure warning light .....2-15

Engine oil viscosity ..............9-5

Engine serial number ............9-10

Engine specifications.............9-7

Starting the engine .............5-11

Engine oil pressure gauge ............2-8

Enter button ................4-2, 4-16

Event data recorders ..............9-29

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ........5-2

Eyeglass case..................2-39

10-2

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

First aid kit ....................6-2

Flashers

(See hazard warning flasher switch)......2-31

Flat tire ......................6-2

Floor mat positioning aid.............7-4

Fluid

Brake fluid ..................8-13

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants.................9-2

Engine coolant ................8-8

Engine oil ...................8-9

Power steering fluid.............8-13

Window washer fluid ............8-14

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-10

Fog light switch .................2-30

Front air bag system

(See supplemental restraint system) .....1-47

Front seats ....................1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants.................9-2

Fuel economy ................5-20

Fuel gauge ..................2-7

Fuel octane rating ..............9-4

Fuel recommendation ............9-3

Fuel-filler door and cap...........3-22

Fuses ......................8-23

Fusible links ...................8-25

Garage door opener, HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver ...................2-53

Gascap.....................3-22

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6

Engine oil pressure gauge ..........2-8

Fuel gauge ..................2-7

Odometer ...................2-4

Speedometer .................2-4

Tachometer ..................2-6

Trip computer .................2-5

Trip odometer .................2-4

Voltmeter ...................2-8

General maintenance ..............8-2

Glass hatch ...................3-21

Glove box ....................2-39

Hands-free phone system, BluetoothT. . .4-104

Hazard warning flasher switch .........2-31

Head restraints ..................1-7

Active Head Restraint ............1-7

Headlight and turn signal switch........2-27

Headlight control switch ............2-27

Headlights....................8-29

Headphones (See NISSAN mobile

entertainment system) .............4-91

Heated seats ..................2-32

Heated steering wheel .............2-32

Heater

Heater and air conditioner

controls ................4-36, 4-44

Heater operation ...........4-38, 4-45

Rear seat air conditioner ..........4-46

Hill descent control switch ...........2-33

Hill descent control system ..........5-34

Hill start assist (HSA) system .........5-35

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver .......2-53

Hood release ..................3-20

Hook

Luggage hook................2-42

Horn .......................2-31

Ignition switch ..................5-8

Immobilizer system .........2-23, 3-3, 5-11

Important vehicle information label.......9-10

In-cabin microfilter ...............8-19

Increasing fuel economy ............5-20

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders) ....................2-12

Inside automatic anti-glare mirror .......3-26

Inside mirror ...................3-26

Instrument brightness control .........2-30

Instrument panel ..............0-6, 2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch ........2-30

Intelligent Key system ..............3-6

Key operating range .............3-8

Key operation .................3-9

Mechanical key ................3-3

Remote keyless entry operation ......3-12

Troubleshooting guide ...........3-14

10-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Warning signals...............3-14

Interior light ...................2-51

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-22

Jump starting ...................6-8

Key ........................3-2

Keyfob battery replacement ..........8-26

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system) ........3-12

Keyless entry system

(See remote keyless entry system) ......3-16

Keys, For Intelligent Key system .........3-2

Labels

Air conditioner specification label .....9-11

C.M.V.S.S. certification label........9-10

Emission control information label .....9-11

Engine serial number ............9-10

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ........9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9

Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-55

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) System................1-22

License plate

Installing the license plate .........9-12

Lift gate .....................3-20

Light

Air bag warning light.........1-56, 2-17

Brake light (See stop light).........8-30

Bulb check/instrument panel........2-13

Bulb replacement ..............8-30

Charge warning light ............2-14

Fog light switch ...............2-30

Headlight and turn signal switch......2-27

Headlight control switch ..........2-27

Headlights..................8-29

Interior light .................2-51

Light bulbs..................8-29

Low tire pressure warning light ......2-16

Low washer fluid warning light.......2-17

Passenger air bag and status light.....1-49

Personal lights ...............2-52

Security indicator light ...........2-20

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ..................2-12

Lights

Map lights ..................2-53

Lock

Child safety rear door lock..........3-6

Door locks ..................3-4

Power door locks...............3-5

Low fuel warning light .............2-16

Low tire pressure warning light ........2-16

Low washer fluid warning light.........2-17

Luggage hook..................2-42

Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12

Luggage storage

(see vehicle loading information)........2-42

Maintenance

Changing the maintenance

interval .................4-7, 4-23

Displaying the maintenance notice

reminder ................4-8, 4-24

General maintenance ............8-2

Inside the vehicle ...............8-3

Maintenance precautions ..........8-5

Outside the vehicle..............8-2

Resetting the maintenance interval. .4-8, 4-23

Seat belt maintenance ...........1-19

Setting .................4-7, 4-23

Under the hood and vehicle .........8-4

Malfunction indicator light ...........2-19

Manual front seat adjustment ..........1-2

Map lights ....................2-53

Map pocket ...................2-40

Meters and gauges................2-3

Instrument brightness control .......2-30

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror .....3-26

Inside mirror .................3-26

Outside mirror control ...........3-28

Outside mirrors ...............3-28

Vanity mirror .................3-25

Music Box hard-disk drive audio system . . .4-74

NISSAN mobile entertainment system

(MES) ......................4-88

10-4

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer

system................2-23, 3-3, 5-11

NISSAN voice recognition system ......4-114

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) .....9-4

Odometer .....................2-4

Oil Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants.................9-2

Changing engine oil ............8-10

Changing engine oil filter..........8-11

Checking engine oil level ..........8-9

Engine oil ...................8-9

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5

Engine oil viscosity ..............9-5

Outside mirror control .............3-28

Outside mirrors .................3-28

Overdrive switch ................5-17

Overheat

If your vehicle overheats ..........6-10

Owner’s manual order form ..........9-30

Owner’s manual/service manual order

information....................9-30

Parking

Parking brake operation ..........5-17

Parking/parking on hills...........5-30

Pedal position adjustment ...........3-24

Personal lights .................2-52

Phone, BluetoothThands-free system. . . .4-104

Power

Front seat adjustment ............1-4

Power door locks...............3-5

Power outlet.................2-34

Power rear windows ............2-49

Power steering fluid.............8-13

Power steering system ...........5-31

Power windows ...............2-47

Rear power windows ............2-49

Precautions

Maintenance precautions ..........8-5

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ..................5-5

Precautions on child

restraints............1-20, 1-28, 1-35

Precautions on seat belt usage ......1-12

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-40

Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Pre-tensioner seat belt system.........1-54

Programmable features ..........4-9, 4-25

Push starting ..................6-10

Radio

Car phone or CB radio ..........4-103

Compact Disc (CD) changer .......4-62

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player ....................4-54

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) changer ................4-59

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) player .................4-67

Rear audio controls .............4-86

Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-85

Readiness for inspection maintenance

(I/M) test.....................9-28

Rear audio controls ...............4-86

Rear power windows ..............2-49

Rear seat air conditioner ............4-46

Rear view monitor................4-33

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch ......................2-26

Rear window wiper and washer switches. . .2-25

Recorders

Event data ..................9-29

Refrigerant recommendation ..........9-6

Registering your vehicle in another country. . .9-9

Remote controller (See NISSAN mobil

e entertainment system) ............4-90

Remote keyless entry system .........3-16

Reporting safety defects (US only) ......9-28

Resetting the fuel economy........4-5, 4-21

Safety

Child safety rear door lock..........3-6

Child seat belts ........1-20, 1-28, 1-35

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-28

Screen (See NISSAN mobile entertainment

system) .....................4-90

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment ........1-2

Front power seat adjustment ........1-4

Second row bench seats ..........1-5

Seat belt

Child safety .................1-14

Infants and small children .........1-15

10-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Injured Person................1-16

Larger children ...............1-15

Precautions on seat belt usage ......1-12

Pregnant women ..............1-16

Pre-tensioner seat belt system.......1-54

Seat belt extenders .............1-19

Seat belt maintenance ...........1-19

Seat belts ..................1-12

Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-18

Three-point type with retractor.......1-16

Seat belt warning light .............2-17

Seatback pockets................2-40

Seats

Adjustment ..................1-2

Automatic drive positioner .........3-29

Front seats ..................1-2

Heated seats ................2-32

Manual front seat adjustment ........1-2

Security indicator light .............2-20

Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer

system), engine start ........2-23, 3-3, 5-11

Self-adjusting brakes ..............8-23

Service manual order form ...........9-30

Servicing air conditioner ............4-47

Setting button ...............4-9, 4-25

Shift lock release ................5-16

Shifting

Automatic transmission...........5-13

Shoulder belt height adjustment ........1-18

Side air bag system (See supplemental side air

bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems). . .1-52

Spark plug replacement ............8-18

Speedometer ...................2-4

SRS warning label ...............1-55

Starting

Before starting the engine .........5-11

Jump starting .................6-8

Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Push starting ................6-10

Starting the engine .............5-11

Startup screen .................4-19

Steering

Heated steering wheel ...........2-32

Power steering fluid.............8-13

Power steering system ...........5-31

Tilting steering wheel ............3-24

Steering wheel audio control switch......4-85

Stop light ....................8-30

Storage .....................2-36

Storage bin................2-37, 2-42

Storage tray ...................2-36

Sun visors ....................3-25

Sunglasses case ................2-39

Sunglasses holder ...............2-39

Sunroof .....................2-50

Supplemental air bag warning labels .....1-55

Supplemental air bag warning light. . .1-56, 2-17

Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-47

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels.......1-55

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-40

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system).........1-40

Switch

Autolight switch ...............2-28

Automatic power window switch .....2-49

Fog light switch ...............2-30

Hazard warning flasher switch .......2-31

Headlight and turn signal switch......2-27

Headlight control switch ..........2-27

Hill descent control switch .........2-33

Ignition switch ................5-8

Overdrive switch ..............5-17

Power door lock switch ...........3-5

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch ....................2-26

Rear window wiper and washer

switches ...................2-25

Turn signal switch..............2-30

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch ....................2-33

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24

Tachometer ....................2-6

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-6

Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),

engine start .............2-23, 3-3, 5-11

Three-way catalyst ................5-2

Tilting steering wheel ..............3-24

TireFlat tire ....................6-2

Spare tire ...................6-4

Tire chains..................8-40

Tire placard .................9-11

Tire pressure ................8-33

Tire rotation .................8-40

Tires of 4-wheel drive............8-42

Types of tires ................8-39

Uniform tire quality grading.........9-26

Wheels and tires ..............8-33

Wheel/tire size ................9-8

Tire pressure

Low tire pressure warning light ......2-16

10-6

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

Tire pressure display ...........4-6, 4-21

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . .5-3

Tire rotation maintenance reminder . . .4-6, 4-21

Top tether strap child restraint .........1-24

Towing

2-wheel drive models............6-12

4-wheel drive models............6-13

Flat towing..................9-26

Tow truck towing ..............6-11

Towing load/specification .........9-20

Trailer towing ................9-17

Transceiver

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver .....2-53

Transmission

Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12

Selector lever lock release .........5-16

Travel (See registering your vehicle in another

country) ......................9-9

Trip computer ...................2-5

Trip odometer ...................2-4

Troubleshooting guide

(NISSAN voice recognition system) .....4-131

Turn signal switch................2-30

Uniform tire quality grading...........9-26

Vanity mirror ...................3-25

Vehicle dimensions and weights ........9-8

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2-33

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-33

Vehicle electronic system ........4-13, 4-28

Vehicle identification ...............9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number).................9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9

Vehicle loading information...........9-12

Vehicle recovery.................6-14

Vehicle security system.............2-22

Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle

immobilizer system), engine start

. .2-23, 3-3, 5-11

Ventilators ....................4-35

Visors ......................3-25

Voice recognition system ...........4-114

Voltmeter .....................2-8

Warning

4WD warning light .............2-15

Air bag warning light.........1-56, 2-17

Anti-lock brake warning light........2-13

Battery charge warning light ........2-14

Brake warning light .............2-14

Door open warning light ..........2-15

Engine oil pressure warning light .....2-15

Hazard warning flasher switch .......2-31

Low fuel warning light ...........2-16

Low tire pressure warning light ......2-16

Low washer fluid warning light.......2-17

Passenger air bag and status light.....1-49

Seat belt warning light ...........2-17

Vehicle security system...........2-22

Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-55

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ..................2-12

Warning lights..................2-12

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer

switches ...................2-25

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8

Wheels and tires ................8-33

Wheel/tire size ..................9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country ..................9-9

Window washer fluid ..............8-14

Windows

Locking passengers’ windows .......2-49

Power rear windows ............2-49

Power windows ...............2-47

Rear power windows ............2-49

Windshield wiper and washer switch .....2-24

Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer

switches ...................2-25

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24

Wiper blades ................8-20

10-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2008 Pathfinder (pat)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

03/23/07—debbie

MEMO

RECOMMENDED FUEL:

NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded pre-

mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91

AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research oc-

tane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline

is not available you may use unleaded regular

gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI

number (Research octane number 91), but you

may notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run on

E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage

the fuel system components and is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-

ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities and

recommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technical

and consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:

●Engine oil with API Certification Mark

●Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in

the “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE:

See Tire and Loading Information label.

The label is typically located on the driver side

center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional

information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

2008 Pathfinder Owner's Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation